The Complete OSHA Guide to Fall Protection Selections from 29 CFR Parts 1910, 1915, 1917, 1918

-

The Complete OSHA Guide to Fall Protection Selections from 29 CFR Parts 1910, 1915, 1917, 1918, and 1926

RegLogic™ is a one-of-a-kind, intuitive approach that allows you to navigate government regulations and standards. It is the difference between reading and understanding.

Compliance Made Simple™ www.mancomm.com

Visit www.mancomm.com/regqr/ or scan the QR code to see if you have the most current edition.

Rock Island

"%1 "%

January 15, 2023 edition

Davenport

D?2

Austin

% ''$$ % ( & "

Disclaimer Although the author and publisher of this book have made every effort to ensure the accuracy and timeliness of the information contained herein, the author and publisher assume no liability with respect to loss or damage caused by or alleged to be caused by reliance on any information contained herein and disclaim any and all warranties, expressed or implied.

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards Scope and definitions

(a) Scope. This subpart applies to all general industry workplaces. It covers all walking-working surfaces unless specifically excluded by an individual section of this subpart. 1910.21(a) (b)  Definitions. The following definitions apply in this subpart: Alternating tread-type stair means a type of stairway consisting of a series of treads that usually are attached to a center support in an alternating manner such that an employee typically does not have both feet on the same level while using the stairway.

Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for equipment such as lifelines, lanyards, deceleration devices, and rope descent systems.

Authorized means an employee who the employer assigns to perform a specific type of duty, or allows in a specific location or area.

Cage means an enclosure mounted on the side rails of a fixed ladder or fastened to a structure behind the fixed ladder that is designed to surround the climbing space of the ladder. A cage also is called a "cage guard" or "basket guard."

Carrier means the track of a ladder safety system that consists of a flexible cable or rigid rail attached to the fixed ladder or immediately adjacent to it.

Combination ladder means a portable ladder that can be used as a stepladder, extension ladder, trestle ladder, or stairway ladder.

The components of a combination ladder also may be used separately as a single ladder.

Dangerous equipment means equipment, such as vats, tanks, electrical equipment, machinery, equipment or machinery with protruding parts, or other similar units, that, because of their function or form, may harm an employee who falls into or onto the equipment.

Designated area means a distinct portion of a walking-working surface delineated by a warning line in which employees may perform work without additional fall protection.

Dockboard means a portable or fixed device that spans a gap or compensates for a difference in elevation between a loading platform and a transport vehicle. Dockboards include, but are not limited to, bridge plates, dock plates, and dock levelers.

Equivalent means alternative designs, equipment, materials, or methods, that the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees compared to the designs, equipment, materials, or methods specified in this subpart.

Extension ladder means a non-self-supporting portable ladder that is adjustable in length.

Failure means a load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. A load refusal is the point at which the ultimate strength of a component or object is exceeded.

Fall hazard means any condition on a walking-working surface that exposes an employee to a risk of harm from a fall on the same level or to a lower level.

Fall protection means any equipment, device, or system that prevents an employee from falling from an elevation or mitigates the effect of such a fall.

Fixed ladder means a ladder with rails or individual rungs that is permanently attached to a structure, building, or equipment. Fixed ladders include individual-rung ladders, but not ship stairs, step bolts, or manhole steps.

Grab bar means an individual horizontal or vertical handhold installed to provide access above the height of the ladder.

Guardrail system means a barrier erected along an unprotected or exposed side, edge, or other area of a walking-working surface to prevent employees from falling to a lower level.

Handrail means a rail used to provide employees with a handhold for support.

Hoist area means any elevated access opening to a walking-working surface through which equipment or materials are loaded or received.

Hole means a gap or open space in a floor, roof, horizontal walkingworking surface, or similar surface that is at least 2 inches (5 cm) in its least dimension.

Individual-rung ladder means a ladder that has rungs individually attached to a building or structure. An individual-rung ladder does not include manhole steps.

Ladder means a device with rungs, steps, or cleats used to gain access to a different elevation.

Ladder safety system means a system designed to eliminate or reduce the possibility of falling from a ladder. A ladder safety system usually consists of a carrier, safety sleeve, lanyard, connec-

1910 General Industry Standards

§1910.21

tors, and body harness. Cages and wells are not ladder safety systems.

Low-slope roof means a roof that has a slope less than or equal to a ratio of 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).

Lower level means a surface or area to which an employee could fall. Such surfaces or areas include, but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, materials, water, equipment, and similar surfaces and structures, or portions thereof.

Manhole steps means steps that are individually attached to, or set into, the wall of a manhole structure.

Maximum intended load means the total load (weight and force) of all employees, equipment, vehicles, tools, materials, and other loads the employer reasonably anticipates to be applied to a walking-working surface at any one time.

Mobile means manually propelled or moveable.

Mobile ladder stand (ladder stand) means a mobile, fixed-height, self-supporting ladder that usually consists of wheels or casters on a rigid base and steps leading to a top step. A mobile ladder stand also may have handrails and is designed for use by one employee at a time.

Mobile ladder stand platform means a mobile, fixed-height, selfsupporting unit having one or more standing platforms that are provided with means of access or egress.

Open riser means the gap or space between treads of stairways that do not have upright or inclined members (risers).

Opening means a gap or open space in a wall, partition, vertical walking-working surface, or similar surface that is at least 30 inches (76 cm) high and at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide, through which an employee can fall to a lower level.

Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a walking-working surface. It consists of a body harness, anchorage, and connector. The means of connection may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or a suitable combination of these.

Personal fall protection system means a system (including all components) an employer uses to provide protection from falling or to safely arrest an employee's fall if one occurs. Examples of personal fall protection systems include personal fall arrest systems, positioning systems, and travel restraint systems.

Platform means a walking-working surface that is elevated above the surrounding area.

Portable ladder means a ladder that can readily be moved or carried, and usually consists of side rails joined at intervals by steps, rungs, or cleats.

Positioning system (work-positioning system) means a system of equipment and connectors that, when used with a body harness or body belt, allows an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall or window sill, and work with both hands free. Positioning systems also are called "positioning system devices" and "work-positioning equipment."

Qualified describes a person who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience has successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the work, or the project.

Ramp means an inclined walking-working surface used to access another level.

Riser means the upright (vertical) or inclined member of a stair that is located at the back of a stair tread or platform and connects close to the front edge of the next higher tread, platform, or landing.

Rope descent system means a suspension system that allows an employee to descend in a controlled manner and, as needed, stop at any point during the descent. A rope descent system usually consists of a roof anchorage, support rope, a descent device, carabiner(s) or shackle(s), and a chair (seatboard). A rope descent system also is called controlled descent equipment or apparatus.

Rope descent systems do not include industrial rope access systems.

Rung, step, or cleat means the cross-piece of a ladder on which an employee steps to climb up and down.

Runway means an elevated walking-working surface, such as a catwalk, a foot walk along shafting, or an elevated walkway between buildings.

Scaffold means any temporary elevated or suspended platform and its supporting structure, including anchorage points, used to support employees, equipment, materials, and other items. For purposes of this subpart, a scaffold does not include a cranesuspended or derrick-suspended personnel platform or a rope descent system.

§1910.26

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards

(5) Exception to paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section. The requirements of paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) do not apply to standard stairs installed prior to January 17, 2017. OSHA will deem those stairs in compliance if they meet the dimension requirements specified in Table D-1 of this section or they use a combination that achieves the angle requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. 1910.25(c)(5)

Table D-1 — Stairway Rise and Tread Dimensions Angle to horizontal

Rise (in inches)

Tread run (in inches)

30° 35'

1 6 ⁄2

11

32° 08'

6 ⁄4

3

10 ⁄4

33° 41'

7

10 ⁄2

35° 16'

1 7 ⁄4

10 ⁄4

36° 52'

7 ⁄2

1

10

38° 29'

3 7 ⁄4

9 ⁄4

40° 08'

8

9 ⁄2

41° 44'

1 8 ⁄4

1 9 ⁄4

43° 22'

8 ⁄2

1

9

45° 00'

3 8 ⁄4

3 8 ⁄4

46° 38'

9

8 ⁄2

48° 16'

9 ⁄4

1

8 ⁄4

49° 54'

9 ⁄2

1

8

3 1 1

3 1

1 1

Figure D-9 — Ship Stairs

(f) Alternating tread-type stairs. In addition to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer must ensure alternating tread-type stairs: 1910.25(f)

(1) Have a series of treads installed at a slope of 50 to 70 degrees from the horizontal; 1910.25(f)(1) (2) Have a distance between handrails of 17 to 24 inches (51 to 61 cm); 1910.25(f)(2) (3) Have a minimum tread depth of 8.5 inches (22 cm); and 1910.25(f)(3)

(4) Have open risers if the tread depth is less than 9.5 inches (24 cm); 1910.25(f)(4) (5) Have a minimum tread width of 7 inches (18 cm), measured at the leading edge of the tread (i.e., nosing). 1910.25(f)(5)

FIGURE D-8 — Dimensions of Standard Stairs

(d) Spiral stairs. In addition to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer must ensure spiral stairs: 1910.25(d) (1) Have a minimum clear width of 26 inches (66 cm); 1910.25(d)(1) (2)  Have a maximum riser height of 9.5 inches (24 cm); 1910.25(d)(2)

(3) Have a minimum headroom above spiral stair treads of at least 6 feet, 6 inches (2 m), measured from the leading edge of the tread; 1910.25(d)(3)

(4) Have a minimum tread depth of 7.5 inches (19 cm), measured at a point 12 inches (30 cm) from the narrower edge; 1910.25(d)(4) (5) Have a uniform tread size; 1910.25(d)(5) (e) Ship stairs. In addition to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer must ensure ship stairs (see Figure D-9 of this section): 1910.25(e) (1) Are installed at a slope of 50 to 70 degrees from the horizontal; 1910.25(e)(1)

(2) Have open risers with a vertical rise between tread surfaces of 6.5 to 12 inches (17 to 30 cm); 1910.25(e)(2) (3) Have minimum tread depth of 4 inches (10 cm); and 1910.25(e)(3) (4) Have a minimum tread width of 18 inches (46 cm). 1910.25(e)(4)

6

Figure D-10 — Angles for Stairs, Ramps, and Ladders

§1910.26

Dockboards

The employer must ensure that each dockboard used meets the requirements of this section. The employer must ensure: (a) Dockboards are capable of supporting the maximum intended load in accordance with §1910.22(b); 1910.26(a) (b)(1) Dockboards put into initial service on or after January 17, 2017 are designed, constructed, and maintained to prevent transfer vehicles from running off the dockboard edge; 1910.26(b)(1) (2) Exception to paragraph (b)(1) of this section. When the employer demonstrates there is no hazard of transfer vehicles running off the dockboard edge, the employer may use dockboards that do not have run-off protection. 1910.26(b)(2) (c) Portable dockboards are secured by anchoring them in place or using equipment or devices that prevent the dockboard from moving out of a safe position. When the employer demonstrates that securing the dockboard is not feasible, the employer must ensure there is sufficient contact between the dockboard and the surface to prevent the dockboard from moving out of a safe position; 1910.26(c)

Duty to have fall protection and falling object protection

§1910.27

Scaffolds and rope descent systems

(a)  Scaffolds. Scaffolds used in general industry must meet the requirements in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L (Scaffolds).

1910.27(a)

(b)  Rope descent systems1910.27(b) (1)  Anchorages. 1910.27(b)(1) (i)  Before any rope descent system is used, the building owner must inform the employer, in writing that the building owner has identified, tested, certified, and maintained each anchorage so it is capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg), in any direction, for each employee attached. The information must be based on an annual inspection by a qualified person and certification of each anchorage by a qualified person, as necessary, and at least every 10 years. 1910.27(b)(1)(i) (ii)  The employer must ensure that no employee uses any anchorage before the employer has obtained written information from the building owner that each anchorage meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section. The employer must keep the information for the duration of the job.

1910.27(b)(1)(ii)

(iii)  The requirements in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section must be implemented no later than November 20, 2017.

1910.27(b)(1)(iii)

(2)  Use of rope descent systems. The employer must ensure: 1910.27(b)(2)

(i)  No rope descent system is used for heights greater than 300 feet (91 m) above grade unless the employer demonstrates that it is not feasible to access such heights by any other means or that those means pose a greater hazard than using a rope descent system; 1910.27(b)(2)(i) (ii) The rope descent system is used in accordance with instructions, warnings, and design limitations set by the manufacturer or under the direction of a qualified person; 1910.27(b)(2)(ii) (iii) Each employee who uses the rope descent system is trained in accordance with §1910.30; 1910.27(b)(2)(iii) (iv)  The rope descent system is inspected at the start of each workshift that it is to be used. The employer must ensure damaged or defective equipment is removed from service immediately and replaced; 1910.27(b)(2)(iv) (v) The rope descent system has proper rigging, including anchorages and tiebacks, with particular emphasis on providing tiebacks when counterweights, cornice hooks, or similar nonpermanent anchorages are used; 1910.27(b)(2)(v) (vi) Each employee uses a separate, independent personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part; 1910.27(b)(2)(vi) (vii) All components of each rope descent system, except seat boards, are capable of sustaining a minimum rated load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). Seat boards must be capable of supporting a live load of 300 pounds (136 kg); 1910.27(b)(2)(vii) (viii) Prompt rescue of each employee is provided in the event of a fall; 1910.27(b)(2)(viii) (ix) The ropes of each rope descent system are effectively padded or otherwise protected, where they can contact edges of the building, anchorage, obstructions, or other surfaces, to prevent them from being cut or weakened; 1910.27(b)(2)(ix) (x) Stabilization is provided at the specific work location when descents are greater than 130 feet (39.6 m); 1910.27(b)(2)(x) (xi) No employee uses a rope descent system when hazardous weather conditions, such as storms or gusty or excessive wind, are present; 1910.27(b)(2)(xi) (xii) Equipment, such as tools, squeegees, or buckets, is secured by a tool lanyard or similar method to prevent it from falling; and 1910.27(b)(2)(xii)

(xiii) The ropes of each rope descent system are protected from exposure to open flames, hot work, corrosive chemicals, and other destructive conditions. 1910.27(b)(2)(xiii)

§1910.28

Duty to have fall protection and falling object protection

(a) General.1910.28(a) (1) This section requires employers to provide protection for each employee exposed to fall and falling object hazards. Unless stated otherwise, the employer must ensure that all fall protection and

falling object protection required by this section meet the criteria in §1910.29, except that personal fall protection systems required by this section meet the criteria of §1910.140. 1910.28(a)(1) (2)  This section does not apply: 1910.28(a)(2) (i) To portable ladders; 1910.28(a)(2)(i) (ii)  When employers are inspecting, investigating, or assessing workplace conditions or work to be performed prior to the start of work or after all work has been completed. This exemption does not apply when fall protection systems or equipment meeting the requirements of §1910.29 have been installed and are available for workers to use for pre-work and post-work inspections, investigations, or assessments; 1910.28(a)(2)(ii) (iii) To fall hazards presented by the exposed perimeters of entertainment stages and the exposed perimeters of rail-station platforms; 1910.28(a)(2)(iii) (iv) To powered platforms covered by §1910.66(j); 1910.28(a)(2)(iv) (v) To aerial lifts covered by §1910.67(c)(2)(v); 1910.28(a)(2)(v) (vi) To telecommunications work covered by §1910.268(n)(7) and (8); and 1910.28(a)(2)(vi) (vii) To electric power generation, transmission, and distribution work covered by §1910.269(g)(2)(i). 1910.28(a)(2)(vii) (b) Protection from fall hazards — 1910.28(b) (1) Unprotected sides and edges. 1910.28(b)(1) (i) Except as provided elsewhere in this section, the employer must ensure that each employee on a walking-working surface with an unprotected side or edge that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected from falling by one or more of the following: 1910.28(b)(1)(i) [A] Guardrail systems; 1910.28(b)(1)(i)[A] [B] Safety net systems; or 1910.28(b)(1)(i)[B] [C] Personal fall protection systems, such as personal fall arrest, travel restraint, or positioning systems.

1910.28(b)(1)(i)[C]

(ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is not feasible or creates a greater hazard to use guardrail, safety net, or personal fall protection systems on residential roofs, the employer must develop and implement a fall protection plan that meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.502(k) and training that meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.503(a) and (c). 1910.28(b)(1)(ii) Note to paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create a greater hazard to use at least one of the above-listed fall protection systems specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of establishing that it is not feasible or creates a greater hazard to provide the fall protection systems specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) and that it is necessary to implement a fall protection plan that complies with §1926.502(k) in the particular work operation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems.

(iii) When the employer can demonstrate that the use of fall protection systems is not feasible on the working side of a platform used at a loading rack, loading dock, or teeming platform, the work may be done without a fall protection system, provided: 1910.28(b)(1)(iii)

[A] The work operation for which fall protection is infeasible is in process; 1910.28(b)(1)(iii)[A] [B] Access to the platform is limited to authorized employees; and, 1910.28(b)(1)(iii)[B] [C] The authorized employees are trained in accordance with §1910.30. 1910.28(b)(1)(iii)[C] (2) Hoist areas. The employer must ensure: 1910.28(b)(2) (i) Each employee in a hoist area is protected from falling 4 feet (1.2 m) or more to a lower level by: 1910.28(b)(2)(i) [A] A guardrail system; 1910.28(b)(2)(i)[A] [B] A personal fall arrest system; or 1910.28(b)(2)(i)[B] [C] A travel restraint system. 1910.28(b)(2)(i)[C] (ii) When any portion of a guardrail system, gate, or chains is removed, and an employee must lean through or over the edge of the access opening to facilitate hoisting, the employee is protected from falling by a personal fall arrest system.

1910.28(b)(2)(ii)

(iii) If grab handles are installed at hoist areas, they meet the requirements of §1910.29(l). 1910.28(b)(2)(iii) (3) Holes. The employer must ensure: 1910.28(b)(3) (i) Each employee is protected from falling through any hole (including skylights) that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level by one or more of the following: 1910.28(b)(3)(i) [A] Covers; 1910.28(b)(3)(i)[A] [B] Guardrail systems; 1910.28(b)(3)(i)[B] [C] Travel restraint systems; or 1910.28(b)(3)(i)[C] [D] Personal fall arrest systems. 1910.28(b)(3)(i)[D] (ii) Each employee is protected from tripping into or stepping into or through any hole that is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) above a lower level by covers or guardrail systems. 1910.28(b)(3)(ii)

7

1910 General Industry Standards

(d) Measures, such as wheel chocks or sand shoes, are used to prevent the transport vehicle (e.g. a truck, semi-trailer, trailer, or rail car) on which a dockboard is placed, from moving while employees are on the dockboard; and 1910.26(d) (e) Portable dockboards are equipped with handholds or other means to permit safe handling of dockboards. 1910.26(e)

§1910.28(b)

§1910.28

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards (iii) Each employee is protected from falling into a stairway floor hole by a fixed guardrail system on all exposed sides, except at the stairway entrance. However, for any stairway used less than once per day where traffic across the stairway floor hole prevents the use of a fixed guardrail system (e.g., holes located in aisle spaces), the employer may protect employees from falling into the hole by using a hinged floor hole cover that meets the criteria in §1910.29 and a removable guardrail system on all exposed sides, except at the entrance to the stairway.

1910.28(b)(3)(iii)

(iv) Each employee is protected from falling into a ladderway floor hole or ladderway platform hole by a guardrail system and toeboards erected on all exposed sides, except at the entrance to the hole, where a self-closing gate or an offset must be used.

1910.28(b)(3)(iv)

(v) Each employee is protected from falling through a hatchway and chute-floor hole by: 1910.28(b)(3)(v) [A] A hinged floor-hole cover that meets the criteria in §1910.29 and a fixed guardrail system that leaves only one exposed side. When the hole is not in use, the employer must ensure the cover is closed or a removable guardrail system is provided on the exposed sides; 1910.28(b)(3)(v)[A] [B] A removable guardrail system and toeboards on not more than two sides of the hole and a fixed guardrail system on all other exposed sides. The employer must ensure the removable guardrail system is kept in place when the hole is not in use; or 1910.28(b)(3)(v)[B] [C] A guardrail system or a travel restraint system when a work operation necessitates passing material through a hatchway or chute floor hole. 1910.28(b)(3)(v)[C] (4) Dockboards. 1910.28(b)(4) (i) The employer must ensure that each employee on a dockboard is protected from falling 4 feet (1.2 m) or more to a lower level by a guardrail system or handrails. 1910.28(b)(4)(i) (ii) A guardrail system or handrails are not required when: 1910.28(b)(4)(ii)

[A] Dockboards are being used solely for materials-handling operations using motorized equipment; 1910.28(b)(4)(ii)[A] [B] Employees engaged in these operations are not exposed to fall hazards greater than 10 feet (3 m); and 1910.28(b)(4)(ii)[B] [C] Those employees have been trained in accordance with §1910.30. 1910.28(b)(4)(ii)[C] (5) Runways and similar walkways. 1910.28(b)(5) (i) The employer must ensure each employee on a runway or similar walkway is protected from falling 4 feet (1.2 m) or more to a lower level by a guardrail system. 1910.28(b)(5)(i) (ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is not feasible to have guardrails on both sides of a runway used exclusively for a special purpose, the employer may omit the guardrail on one side of the runway, provided the employer ensures: 1910.28(b)(5)(ii)

[A] The runway is at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide; and 1910.28(b)(5)(ii)[A]

[B] Each employee is provided with and uses a personal fall arrest system or travel restraint system. 1910.28(b)(5)(ii)[B] (6) Dangerous equipment. The employer must ensure: 1910.28(b)(6) (i) Each employee less than 4 feet (1.2 m) above dangerous equipment is protected from falling into or onto the dangerous equipment by a guardrail system or a travel restraint system, unless the equipment is covered or guarded to eliminate the hazard. 1910.28(b)(6)(i) (ii) Each employee 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above dangerous equipment must be protected from falling by: 1910.28(b)(6)(ii) [A] Guardrail systems; 1910.28(b)(6)(ii)[A] [B] Safety net systems; 1910.28(b)(6)(ii)[B] [C] Travel restraint systems; or 1910.28(b)(6)(ii)[C] [D] Personal fall arrest systems. 1910.28(b)(6)(ii)[D] (7) Openings. The employer must ensure that each employee on a walking-working surface near an opening, including one with a chute attached, where the inside bottom edge of the opening is less than 39 inches (99 cm) above that walking-working surface and the outside bottom edge of the opening is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected from falling by the use of: 1910.28(b)(7)

(i) Guardrail systems; 1910.28(b)(7)(i) (ii) Safety net systems; 1910.28(b)(7)(ii) (iii) Travel restraint systems; or, 1910.28(b)(7)(iii) (iv) Personal fall arrest systems. 1910.28(b)(7)(iv)

8

(8) Repair pits, service pits, and assembly pits less than 10 feet in depth. The use of a fall protection system is not required for a repair pit, service pit, or assembly pit that is less than 10 feet (3 m) deep, provided the employer: 1910.28(b)(8) (i) Limits access within 6 feet (1.8 m) of the edge of the pit to authorized employees trained in accordance with §1910.30; 1910.28(b)(8)(i)

(ii) Applies floor markings at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the edge of the pit in colors that contrast with the surrounding area; or places a warning line at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the edge of the pit as well as stanchions that are capable of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally against the stanchion at a height of 30 inches (76 cm); or places a combination of floor markings and warning lines at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the edge of the pit. When two or more pits in a common area are not more than 15 feet (4.5m) apart, the employer may comply by placing contrasting floor markings at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the pit edge around the entire area of the pits; and 1910.28(b)(8)(ii) (iii) Posts readily visible caution signs that meet the requirements of §1910.145 and state "Caution — Open Pit." 1910.28(b)(8)(iii) (9)  Fixed ladders (that extend more than 24 feet (7.3 m) above a lower level). 1910.28(b)(9) (i) For fixed ladders that extend more than 24 feet (7.3 m) above a lower level, the employer must ensure: 1910.28(b)(9)(i) [A]  Existing fixed ladders. Each fixed ladder installed before November 19, 2018 is equipped with a personal fall arrest system, ladder safety system, cage, or well; 1910.28(b)(9)(i)[A] [B]  New fixed ladders. Each fixed ladder installed on and after November 19, 2018, is equipped with a personal fall arrest system or a ladder safety system; 1910.28(b)(9)(i)[B] [C]  Replacement. When a fixed ladder, cage, or well, or any portion of a section thereof, is replaced, a personal fall arrest system or ladder safety system is installed in at least that section of the fixed ladder, cage, or well where the replacement is located; and 1910.28(b)(9)(i)[C] [D]  Final deadline. On and after November 18, 2036, all fixed ladders are equipped with a personal fall arrest system or a ladder safety system. 1910.28(b)(9)(i)[D] (ii) When a one-section fixed ladder is equipped with a personal fall protection or a ladder safety system or a fixed ladder is equipped with a personal fall arrest or ladder safety system on more than one section, the employer must ensure: 1910.28(b)(9)(ii) [A] The personal fall arrest system or ladder safety system provides protection throughout the entire vertical distance of the ladder, including all ladder sections; and 1910.28(b)(9)(ii)[A] [B] The ladder has rest platforms provided at maximum intervals of 150 feet (45.7 m). 1910.28(b)(9)(ii)[B] (iii) The employer must ensure ladder sections having a cage or well: 1910.28(b)(9)(iii) [A] Are offset from adjacent sections; and 1910.28(b)(9)(iii)[A] [B] Have landing platforms provided at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15.2 m). 1910.28(b)(9)(iii)[B] (iv) The employer may use a cage or well in combination with a personal fall arrest system or ladder safety system provided that the cage or well does not interfere with the operation of the system. 1910.28(b)(9)(iv) (10) Outdoor advertising (billboards). 1910.28(b)(10) (i) The requirements in paragraph (b)(9) of this section, and other requirements in subparts D and I of this part, apply to fixed ladders used in outdoor advertising activities. 1910.28(b)(10)(i) (ii)  When an employee engaged in outdoor advertising climbs a fixed ladder before November 19, 2018 that is not equipped with a cage, well, personal fall arrest system, or a ladder safety system the employer must ensure the employee: 1910.28(b)(10)(ii) [A] Receives training and demonstrates the physical capability to perform the necessary climbs in accordance with §1910.29(h); 1910.28(b)(10)(ii)[A] [B] Wears a body harness equipped with an 18-inch (46 cm) rest lanyard; 1910.28(b)(10)(ii)[B] [C] Keeps both hands free of tools or material when climbing on the ladder; and 1910.28(b)(10)(ii)[C] [D] Is protected by a fall protection system upon reaching the work position. 1910.28(b)(10)(ii)[D] (11) Stairways. The employer must ensure: 1910.28(b)(11) (i) Each employee exposed to an unprotected side or edge of a stairway landing that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected by a guardrail or stair rail system; 1910.28(b)(11)(i)

Fall protection systems and falling object protection — criteria and practices (ii) Each flight of stairs having at least 3 treads and at least 4 risers is equipped with stair rail systems and handrails as follows: 1910.28(b)(11)(ii)

Stair width

Enclosed

One open side

Less than 44 inches (1.1 m).

At least one handrail.

One stair rail system One stair rail with handrail on open system each open side. side.

44 inches (1.1 m) to 88 inches (2.2 m).

One handrail on each enclosed side.

One stair rail system with handrail on open side and one handrail on enclosed side.

One stair rail system with handrail on each open side.

Greater than 88 inches (2.2 m).

One handrail on each enclosed side and one intermediate handrail located in the middle of the stair.

One stair rail system with handrail on open side, one handrail on enclosed side, and one intermediate handrail located in the middle of the stair.

One stair rail system with handrail on each open side and one intermediate handrail located in the middle of the stair.

Exterior stairs less than 44 inches (1.1 m).

With earth built up on both sides

Two open sides

One handrail on at least one side.

Note to table: The width of the stair must be clear of all obstructions except handrails.

(iii) Each ship stairs and alternating tread type stairs is equipped with handrails on both sides. 1910.28(b)(11)(iii) (12) Scaffolds and rope descent systems. The employer must ensure: 1910.28(b)(12) (i) Each employee on a scaffold is protected from falling in accordance 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L; and 1910.28(b)(12)(i) (ii) Each employee using a rope descent system 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected from falling by a personal fall arrest system. 1910.28(b)(12)(ii) (13) Work on low-slope roofs. 1910.28(b)(13) (i) When work is performed less than 6 feet (1.6 m) from the roof edge, the employer must ensure each employee is protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, travel restraint system, or personal fall arrest system. 1910.28(b)(13)(i) (ii) When work is performed at least 6 feet (1.6 m) but less than 15 feet (4.6 m) from the roof edge, the employer must ensure each employee is protected from falling by using a guardrail system, safety net system, travel restraint system, or personal fall arrest system. The employer may use a designated area when performing work that is both infrequent and temporary.

1910.28(b)(13)(ii)

(iii) When work is performed 15 feet (4.6 m) or more from the roof edge, the employer must: 1910.28(b)(13)(iii) [A]  Protect each employee from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, travel restraint system, or personal fall arrest system or a designated area. The employer is not required to provide any fall protection, provided the work is both infrequent and temporary; and 1910.28(b)(13)(iii)[A] [B] Implement and enforce a work rule prohibiting employees from going within 15 feet (4.6 m) of the roof edge without using fall protection in accordance with paragraphs (b)(13)(i) and (ii) of this section. 1910.28(b)(13)(iii)[B] (14) Slaughtering facility platforms. 1910.28(b)(14) (i) The employer must protect each employee on the unprotected working side of a slaughtering facility platform that is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level from falling by using: 1910.28(b)(14)(i)

[A] Guardrail systems; or 1910.28(b)(14)(i)[A] [B] Travel restraint systems. 1910.28(b)(14)(i)[B] (ii) When the employer can demonstrate the use of a guardrail or travel restraint system is not feasible, the work may be done without those systems provided: 1910.28(b)(14)(ii) [A] The work operation for which fall protection is infeasible is in process; 1910.28(b)(14)(ii)[A] [B] Access to the platform is limited to authorized employees; and 1910.28(b)(14)(ii)[B] [C] The authorized employees are trained in accordance with §1910.30. 1910.28(b)(14)(ii)[C]

(15) Walking-working surfaces not otherwise addressed. Except as provided elsewhere in this section or by other subparts of this part, the employer must ensure each employee on a walking-working surface 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected from falling by: 1910.28(b)(15) (i) Guardrail systems; 1910.28(b)(15)(i) (ii) Safety net systems; or 1910.28(b)(15)(ii) (iii) Personal fall protection systems, such as personal fall arrest, travel restraint, or positioning systems. 1910.28(b)(15)(iii) (c) Protection from falling objects. When an employee is exposed to falling objects, the employer must ensure that each employee wears head protection that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part. In addition, the employer must protect employees from falling objects by implementing one or more of the following: 1910.28(c) (1) Erecting toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems to prevent objects from falling to a lower level; 1910.28(c)(1) (2) Erecting canopy structures and keeping potential falling objects far enough from an edge, hole, or opening to prevent them from falling to a lower level; or 1910.28(c)(2) (3) Barricading the area into which objects could fall, prohibiting employees from entering the barricaded area, and keeping objects far enough from an edge or opening to prevent them from falling to a lower level. 1910.28(c)(3)

§1910.29

Fall protection systems and falling object protection — criteria and practices

(a) General requirements. The employer must: 1910.29(a) (1) Ensure each fall protection system and falling object protection, other than personal fall protection systems, that this part requires meets the requirements in this section. The employer must ensure each personal fall protection system meets the requirements in subpart I of this part; and 1910.29(a)(1) (2) Provide and install all fall protection systems and falling object protection this subpart requires, and comply with the other requirements in this subpart before any employee begins work that necessitates fall or falling object protection. 1910.29(a)(2) (b)  Guardrail systems. The employer must ensure guardrail systems meet the following requirements: 1910.29(b) (1) The top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system members, are 42 inches (107 cm), plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm), above the walking-working surface. The top edge height may exceed 45 inches (114 cm), provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of paragraph (b) of this section (see Figure D-11 of this section). 1910.29(b)(1) (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, or equivalent intermediate members are installed between the walking-working surface and the top edge of the guardrail system as follows when there is not a wall or parapet that is at least 21 inches (53 cm) high: 1910.29(b)(2) (i) Midrails are installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking-working surface; 1910.29(b)(2)(i)

(ii) Screens and mesh extend from the walking-working surface to the top rail and along the entire opening between top rail supports; 1910.29(b)(2)(ii) (iii) Intermediate vertical members (such as balusters) are installed no more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart; and 1910.29(b)(2)(iii)

(iv) Other equivalent intermediate members (such as additional midrails and architectural panels) are installed so that the openings are not more than 19 inches (48 cm) wide. 1910.29(b)(2)(iv) (3) Guardrail systems are capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied in a downward or outward direction within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, at any point along the top rail. 1910.29(b)(3) (4) When the 200-pound (890-N) test load is applied in a downward direction, the top rail of the guardrail system must not deflect to a height of less than 39 inches (99 cm) above the walking-working surface. 1910.29(b)(4) (5)  Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and other equivalent intermediate members are capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (667 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the intermediate member. 1910.29(b)(5) (6) Guardrail systems are smooth-surfaced to protect employees from injury, such as punctures or lacerations, and to prevent catching or snagging of clothing. 1910.29(b)(6) (7) The ends of top rails and midrails do not overhang the terminal posts, except where the overhang does not pose a projection hazard for employees. 1910.29(b)(7)

9

1910 General Industry Standards

Table D-2 — Stairway Handrail Requirements

§1910.29(b)

§1910.29

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards

(8) Steel banding and plastic banding are not used for top rails or midrails. 1910.29(b)(8) (9) Top rails and midrails are at least 0.25-inches (0.6 cm) in diameter or in thickness. 1910.29(b)(9) (10) When guardrail systems are used at hoist areas, a removable guardrail section, consisting of a top rail and midrail, are placed across the access opening between guardrail sections when employees are not performing hoisting operations. The employer may use chains or gates instead of a removable guardrail section at hoist areas if the employer demonstrates the chains or gates provide a level of safety equivalent to guardrails. 1910.29(b)(10) (11) When guardrail systems are used around holes, they are installed on all unprotected sides or edges of the hole. 1910.29(b)(11) (12) For guardrail systems used around holes through which materials may be passed: 1910.29(b)(12) (i) When materials are being passed through the hole, not more than two sides of the guardrail system are removed; and 1910.29(b)(12)(i)

(ii) When materials are not being passed through the hole, the hole must be guarded by a guardrail system along all unprotected sides or edges or closed over with a cover. 1910.29(b)(12)(ii) (13) When guardrail systems are used around holes that serve as points of access (such as ladderways), the guardrail system opening: 1910.29(b)(13) (i) Has a self-closing gate that slides or swings away from the hole, and is equipped with a top rail and midrail or equivalent intermediate member that meets the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section; or 1910.29(b)(13)(i) (ii) Is offset to prevent an employee from walking or falling into the hole; 1910.29(b)(13)(ii) (14) Guardrail systems on ramps and runways are installed along each unprotected side or edge. 1910.29(b)(14) (15) Manila or synthetic rope used for top rails or midrails are inspected as necessary to ensure that the rope continues to meet the strength requirements in paragraphs (b)(3) and (5) of this section. 1910.29(b)(15) Note to paragraph (b) of this section: The criteria and practices requirements for guardrail systems on scaffolds are contained in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L.

(iv) Is clearly visible from a distance of 25 feet (7.6 m) away, and anywhere within the designated area; 1910.29(d)(2)(iv) (v) Is erected as close to the work area as the task permits; and 1910.29(d)(2)(v)

(vi) Is erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge for work that is both temporary and infrequent, or not less than 15 feet (4.6 m) for other work. 1910.29(d)(2)(vi) (3) When mobile mechanical equipment is used to perform work that is both temporary and infrequent in a designated area, the employer must ensure the warning line is erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the unprotected side or edge that is parallel to the direction in which the mechanical equipment is operated, and not less than 10 feet (3 m) from the unprotected side or edge that is perpendicular to the direction in which the mechanical equipment is operated. 1910.29(d)(3) (e) Covers. The employer must ensure each cover for a hole in a walkingworking surface:1910.29(e) (1) Is capable of supporting without failure, at least twice the maximum intended load that may be imposed on the cover at any one time; and 1910.29(e)(1) (2) Is secured to prevent accidental displacement. 1910.29(e)(2) (f) Handrails and stair rail systems. The employer must ensure: 1910.29(f)

(1) Height criteria. 1910.29(f)(1) (i)  Handrails are not less than 30 inches (76 cm) and not more than 38 inches (97 cm), as measured from the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the handrail (see Figure D-12 of this section). 1910.29(f)(1)(i) (ii) The height of stair rail systems meets the following: 1910.29(f)(1)(ii)

[A] The height of stair rail systems installed before January 17, 2017 is not less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the top rail; and 1910.29(f)(1)(ii)[A]

[B]  The height of stair rail systems installed on or after January 17, 2017 is not less than 42 inches (107 cm) from the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the top rail. 1910.29(f)(1)(ii)[B] (iii) The top rail of a stair rail system may serve as a handrail only when: 1910.29(f)(1)(iii) [A]  The height of the stair rail system is not less than 36 inches (91 cm) and not more than 38 inches (97 cm) as measured at the leading edge of the stair tread to the top surface of the top rail (see Figure D-13 of this section); and 1910.29(f)(1)(iii)[A]

Figure D-11 — Guard Rail Systems

(c) Safety net systems. The employer must ensure each safety net system meets the requirements in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart M. 1910.29(c)

[B] The top rail of the stair rail system meets the other handrail requirements in paragraph (f) of this section. 1910.29(f)(1)(iii)[B] (2) Finger clearance. The minimum clearance between handrails and any other object is 2.25 inches (5.7 cm). 1910.29(f)(2) (3) Surfaces. Handrails and stair rail systems are smooth-surfaced to protect employees from injury, such as punctures or lacerations, and to prevent catching or snagging of clothing. 1910.29(f)(3) (4) Openings in stair rails. No opening in a stair rail system exceeds 19 inches (48 cm) at its least dimension. 1910.29(f)(4) (5) Handhold. Handrails have the shape and dimension necessary so that employees can grasp the handrail firmly. 1910.29(f)(5) (6) Projection hazards. The ends of handrails and stair rail systems do not present any projection hazards. 1910.29(f)(6) (7) Strength criteria. Handrails and the top rails of stair rail systems are capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied in any downward or outward direction within 2 inches (5 cm) of any point along the top edge of the rail.

1910.29(f)(7)

(d) Designated areas.1910.29(d) (1) When the employer uses a designated area, the employer must ensure: 1910.29(d)(1) (i) Employees remain within the designated area while work operations are underway; and 1910.29(d)(1)(i) (ii) The perimeter of the designated area is delineated with a warning line consisting of a rope, wire, tape, or chain that meets the requirements of paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this section.

1910.29(d)(1)(ii)

(2) The employer must ensure each warning line: 1910.29(d)(2) (i) Has a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (0.89 kN); 1910.29(d)(2)(i)

(ii) Is installed so its lowest point, including sag, is not less than 34 inches (86 cm) and not more than 39 inches (99 cm) above the walking-working surface; 1910.29(d)(2)(ii) (iii) Is supported in such a manner that pulling on one section of the line will not result in slack being taken up in adjacent sections causing the line to fall below the limits specified in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section; 1910.29(d)(2)(iii)

10

Figure D-12 — Handrail Measurement

Powered platforms for building maintenance [G] The maximum rated speed of the platform shall not exceed 50 feet per minute (0.3 ms) with single speed hoists, nor 75 feet per minute (0.4 ms) with multi-speed hoists.

1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[K]

[L] The platform shall be provided with a secondary wire rope suspension system if the platform contains overhead structures which restrict the emergency egress of employees. A horizontal lifeline or a direct connection anchorage shall be provided as part of a personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part for each employee on such a platform. 1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[L] [M] A vertical lifeline shall be provided as part of a personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part for each employee on a working platform suspended by two or more wire ropes, if the failure of one wire rope or suspension attachment will cause the platform to upset. If a secondary wire rope suspension is used, vertical lifelines are not required for the personal fall arrest system, provided that each employee is attached to a horizontal lifeline anchored to the platform. 1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[M] [N] An emergency electric operating device shall be provided on roof powered platforms near the hoisting machine for use in the event of failure of the normal operating device located on the working platform, or failure of the cable connected to the platform. The emergency electric operating device shall be mounted in a secured compartment, and the compartment shall be labeled with instructions for use. A means for opening the compartment shall be mounted in a break-glass receptable located near the emergency electric operating device or in an equivalent secure and accessible location.

1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[N]

(iii) Single point suspended working platforms. 1910.66(f)(5)(iii) [A] The requirements of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii)(A) through (K) of this section shall also apply to a single point working platform. 1910.66(f)(5)(iii)[A] [B] Each single point suspended working platform shall be provided with a secondary wire rope suspension system which will prevent the working platform from falling should there be a failure of the primary means of support, or if the platform contains overhead structures which restrict the egress of the employees. A horizontal life line or a direct connection anchorage shall be provided as part of a personal fall arrest system that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part for each employee on the platform. 1910.66(f)(5)(iii)[B] (iv) Ground-rigged working platforms. 1910.66(f)(5)(iv) [A] Groundrigged working platforms shall comply with all the requirements of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii)(A) through (M) of this section. 1910.66(f)(5)(iv)[A] [B] After each day's use, the power supply within the building shall be disconnected from a ground-rigged working platform, and the platform shall be either disengaged from its suspension points or secured and stored at grade.

1910.66(f)(5)(iv)[B]

(v) Intermittently stabilized platforms. 1910.66(f)(5)(v) [A] The platform shall comply with paragraphs (F)(5)(ii)(A) through (M) of this section. 1910.66(f)(5)(v)[A] [B] Each stabilizer tie shall be equipped with a "quick connectquick disconnect" device which cannot be accidently disengaged, for attachment to the building anchor, and shall be resistant to adverse environmental conditions.

1910.66(f)(5)(v)[B]

[C] The platform shall be provided with a stopping device that will interrupt the hoist power supply in the event the platform contacts a stabilizer tie during its ascent. 1910.66(f)(5)(v)[C] [D] Building face rollers shall not be placed at the anchor setting if exterior anchors are used on the building face.

[E] Stabilizer ties used on intermittently stabilized platforms shall allow for the specific attachment length needed to effect the predetermined angulation of the suspended wire rope.

The specific attachment length shall be maintained at all building anchor locations. 1910.66(f)(5)(v)[E] [F] The platform shall be in continuous contact with the face of the building during ascent and descent. 1910.66(f)(5)(v)[F] [G] The attachment and removal of stabilizer ties shall not require the horizontal movement of the platform.

1910.66(f)(5)(v)[G]

[H] The platform-mounted equipment and its suspension wire ropes shall not be physically damaged by the loads from the stabilizer tie or its building anchor. The platform, platform mounted equipment and wire ropes shall be able to withstand a load that is at least twice the ultimate strength of the stabilizer tie. 1910.66(f)(5)(v)[H] Note: See Figure II in appendix B of this section for a description of a typical intermittent stabilization system.

(vi) Button-guide stabilized platforms. 1910.66(f)(5)(vi) [A] The platform shall comply with paragraphs (f)(5)(ii)(A) through (M) of this section. 1910.66(f)(5)(vi)[A] [B] Each guide track on the platform shall engage a minimum of two guide buttons during any vertical travel of the platform following the initial button engagement. 1910.66(f)(5)(vi)[B] [C] Each guide track on a platform that is part of a roof rigged system shall be provided with a storage position on the platform. 1910.66(f)(5)(vi)[C] [D] Each guide track on the platform shall be sufficiently maneuverable by platform occupants to permit easy engagement of the guide buttons, and easy movement into and out of its storage position on the platform. 1910.66(f)(5)(vi)[D] [E] Two guide tracks shall be mounted on the platform and shall provide continuous contact with the building face.

1910.66(f)(5)(vi)[E]

[F] The load carrying components of the button guide stabilization system which transmit the load into the platform shall be capable of supporting the weight of the platform, or provision shall be made in the guide track connectors or platform attachments to prevent the weight of the platform from being transmitted to the platform attachments. 1910.66(f)(5)(vi)[F] Note: See Figure III in Appendix B of this section for a description of a typical button guide stabilization system.

(6) Supported equipment. 1910.66(f)(6) (i) Supported equipment shall maintain a vertical position in respect to the face of the building by means other than friction.

1910.66(f)(6)(i)

(ii) Cog wheels or equivalent means shall be incorporated to provide climbing traction between the supported equipment and the building guides. Additional guide wheels or shoes shall be incorporated as may be necessary to ensure that the drive wheels are continuously held in positive engagement with the building guides. 1910.66(f)(6)(ii) (iii) Launch guide mullions indexed to the building guides and retained in alignment with the building guides shall be used to align drive wheels entering the building guides. 1910.66(f)(6)(iii) (iv) Manned platforms used on supported equipment shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii)(A), (f)(5)(ii)(B), and (f)(5)(ii)(D) through (K) of this section covering suspended equipment. 1910.66(f)(6)(iv) (7) Suspension wire ropes and rope connections. 1910.66(f)(7) (i) Each specific installation shall use suspension wire ropes or combination cable and connections meeting the specification recommended by the manufacturer of the hoisting machine used. Connections shall be capable of developing at least 80 percent of the rated breaking strength of the wire rope.

1910.66(f)(7)(i)

(ii) Each suspension rope shall have a "Design Factor" of at least 10. The "Design Factor" is the ratio of the rated strength of the suspension wire rope to the rated working load, and shall be calculated using the following formula: 1910.66(f)(7)(ii)

Where: F = Design factor S = Manufacturer's rated strength of one suspension rope N = Number of suspension ropes under load W = Rated working load on all ropes at any point of travel (iii) Suspension wire rope grade shall be at least improved plow steel or equivalent. 1910.66(f)(7)(iii)

1910.66(f)(5)(v)[D]

17

1910 General Industry Standards

1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[G]

[H] Provisions shall be made for securing all tools, water tanks, and other accessories to prevent their movement or accumulation on the floor of the platform. 1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[H] [I] Portable fire extinguishers conforming to the provisions of §1910.155 and §1910.157 of this part shall be provided and securely attached on all working platforms. 1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[I] [J] Access to and egress from a working platfrom, except for those that land directly on a safe surface, shall be provided by stairs, ladders, platforms and runways conforming to the provisions of subpart D of this part. Access gates shall be self-closing and self-latching. 1910.66(f)(5)(ii)[J] [K] Means of access to or egress from a working platform which is 48 inches (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface shall be provided with a guardrail system or ladder handrails that conform to the provisions of subpart D of this part.

§1910.66(f)

§1910.66

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards (iv) Suspension wire ropes shall be sized to conform with the required design factor, but shall not be less than 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) in diameter. 1910.66(f)(7)(iv) (v) No more than one reverse bend in six wire rope lays shall be permitted. 1910.66(f)(7)(v) (vi) A corrosion-resistant tag shall be securely attached to one of the wire rope fastenings when a suspension wire rope is to be used at a specific location and will remain in that location. This tag shall bear the following wire rope data: 1910.66(f)(7)(vi) [A] The diameter (inches and/or mm); 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[A] [B] Construction classification; 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[B] [C] Whether non-preformed or preformed; 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[C] [D] The grade of material; 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[D] [E] The manufacturer's rated strength; 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[E] [F] The manufacturer's name; 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[F] [G] The month and year the ropes were installed; and 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[G]

[H] The name of the person or company which installed the ropes. 1910.66(f)(7)(vi)[H] (vii) A new tag shall be installed at each rope renewal.

1910.66(f)(7)(vii)

(viii) The original tag shall be stamped with the date of the resocketing, or the original tag shall be retained and a supplemental tag shall be provided when ropes are resocketed. The supplemental tag shall show the date of resocketing and the name of the person or company that resocketed the rope. 1910.66(f)(7)(viii) (ix) Winding drum type hoists shall contain at least three wraps of the suspension wire rope on the drum when the suspended unit has reached the lowest possible point of its vertical travel.

1910.66(f)(7)(ix)

(x) Traction drum and sheave type hoists shall be provided with a wire rope of sufficient length to reach the lowest possible point of vertical travel of the suspended unit, and an additional length of the wire rope of at least four feet (1.2 m). 1910.66(f)(7)(x) (xi) The lengthening or repairing of suspension wire ropes is prohibited. 1910.66(f)(7)(xi) (xii) Babbitted fastenings for suspension wire rope are prohibited.

1910.66(f)(7)(xii)

(8) Control circuits, power circuits and their components. 1910.66(f)(8) (i) Electrical wiring and equipment shall comply with subpart S of this part, except as otherwise required by this section.

1910.66(f)(8)(i)

(ii) Electrical runway conductor systems shall be of a type designed for use in exterior locations, and shall be located so that they do not come into contact with accumulated snow or water. 1910.66(f)(8)(ii) (iii) Cables shall be protected against damage resulting from overtensioning or from other causes. 1910.66(f)(8)(iii) (iv) Devices shall be included in the control system for the equipment which will provide protection against electrical overloads, three phase reversal and phase failure. The control system shall have a separate method, independent of the direction control circuit, for breaking the power circuit in case of an emergency or malfunction. 1910.66(f)(8)(iv) (v) Suspended or supported equipment shall have a control system which will require the operator of the equipment to follow predetermined procedures. 1910.66(f)(8)(v) (vi) The following requirements shall apply to electrical protection devices: 1910.66(f)(8)(vi) [A] On installations where the carriage does not have a stability factor of at least four against overturning, electrical contact(s) shall be provided and so connected that the operating devices for the suspended or supported equipment shall be operative only when the carriage is located and mechanically retained at an established operating point. 1910.66(f)(8)(vi)[A] [B] Overload protection shall be provided in the hoisting or suspension system to protect against the equipment operating in the "up" direction with a load in excess of 125 percent of the rated load of the platform; and 1910.66(f)(8)(vi)[B] [C] An automatic detector shall be provided for each suspension point that will interrupt power to all hoisting motors for travel in the "down" direction, and apply the primary brakes if any suspension wire rope becomes slack. A continuouspressure rigging-bypass switch designed for use during rigging is permitted. This switch shall only be used during rigging. 1910.66(f)(8)(vi)[C] (vii) Upper and lower directional switches designed to prevent the travel of suspended units beyond safe upward and downward levels shall be provided. 1910.66(f)(8)(vii) (viii) Emergency stop switches shall be provided on remote controlled, roof-powered manned platforms adjacent to each control station on the platform. 1910.66(f)(8)(viii)

18

(ix) Cables which are in constant tension shall have overload devices which will prevent the tension in the cable from interfering with the load limiting device required in paragraph (f)(8)(vi)(B) of this section, or with the platform roll limiting device required in paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(C) of this section. The setting of these devices shall be coordinated with other overload settings at the time of design of the system, and shall be clearly indicated on or near the device. The device shall interrupt the equipment travel in the "down" direction. 1910.66(f)(8)(ix) (g) Inspection and tests.1910.66(g) (1) Installations and alterations. All completed building maintenance equipment installations shall be inspected and tested in the field before being placed in initial service to determine that all parts of the installation conform to applicable requirements of this standard, and that all safety and operating equipment is functioning as required. A similar inspection and test shall be made following any major alteration to an existing installation. No hoist in an installation shall be subjected to a load in excess of 125 percent of its rated load. 1910.66(g)(1) (2) Periodic inspections and tests. 1910.66(g)(2) (i) Related building supporting structures shall undergo periodic inspection by a competent person at intervals not exceeding 12 months. 1910.66(g)(2)(i) (ii) All parts of the equipment including control systems shall be inspected, and, where necessary, tested by a competent person at intervals specified by the manufacturer/supplier, but not to exceed 12 months, to determine that they are in safe operating condition. Parts subject to wear, such as wire ropes, bearings, gears, and governors shall be inspected and/or tested to determine that they have not worn to such an extent as to affect the safe operation of the installation. 1910.66(g)(2)(ii) (iii) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each inspection and test required under paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. The certification record shall include the date of the inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and the number, or other identifier, of the building support structure and equipment which was inspected. This certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative and by the employer. 1910.66(g)(2)(iii) (iv) Working platforms and their components shall be inspected by the employer for visible defects before every use and after each occurrence which could affect the platform's structural integrity.

1910.66(g)(2)(iv)

(3) Maintenance inspections and tests. 1910.66(g)(3) (i) A maintenance inspection and, where necessary, a test shall be made of each platform installation every 30 days, or where the work cycle is less than 30 days such inspection and/or test shall be made prior to each work cycle. This inspection and test shall follow procedures recommended by the manufacturer, and shall be made by a competent person. 1910.66(g)(3)(i) (ii) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each inspection and test performed under paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section. The certification record shall include the date of the inspection and test, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and/or test, and an identifier for the platform installation which was inspected. The certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative and by the employer. 1910.66(g)(3)(ii) (4) Special inspection of governors and secondary brakes.

1910.66(g)(4)

(i) Governors and secondary brakes shall be inspected and tested at intervals specified by the manufacturer/supplier but not to exceed every 12 months. 1910.66(g)(4)(i) (ii) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the initiating device for the secondary braking system operates at the proper overspeed. 1910.66(g)(4)(ii) (iii) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the secondary brake is functioning properly. 1910.66(g)(4)(iii) (iv) If any hoisting machine or initiating device for the secondary brake system is removed from the equipment for testing, all reinstalled and directly related components shall be reinspected prior to returning the equipment installation to service.

1910.66(g)(4)(iv)

(v) Inspection of governors and secondary brakes shall be performed by a competent person. 1910.66(g)(4)(v) (vi) The secondary brake governor and actuation device shall be tested before each day's use. Where testing is not feasible, a visual inspection of the brake shall be made instead to ensure that it is free to operate. 1910.66(g)(4)(vi) (5) Suspension wire rope maintenance, inspection and replacement.

1910.66(g)(5)

Powered platforms for building maintenance

1910.66(g)(5)(iv)

[A] Broken wires exceeding three wires in one strand or six wires in one rope lay; 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[A] [B] Distortion of rope structure such as would result from crushing or kinking; 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[B] [C] Evidence of heat damage; 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[C] [D] Evidence of rope deterioration from corrosion; 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[D]

[E] A broken wire within 18 inches (460.8 mm) of the end attachments; 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[E] [F] Noticeable rusting and pitting; 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[F] [G] Evidence of core failure (a lengthening of rope lay, protrusion of the rope core and a reduction in rope diameter suggests core failure); or 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[G] [H] More than one valley break (broken wire). 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[H] [I] Outer wire wear exceeds one-third of the original outer wire diameter. 1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[I] [J] Any other condition which the competent person determines has significantly affected the integrity of the rope.

1910.66(g)(5)(iv)[J]

(v) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each monthly inspection of a suspension wire rope as required in paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this section. The record shall include the date of the inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and a number, or other identifier, of the wire rope which was inspected. This record of inspection shall be made available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative and by the employer. 1910.66(g)(5)(v) (6) Hoist inspection. Before lowering personnel below the top elevation of the building, the hoist shall be tested each day in the lifting direction with the intended load to make certain it has sufficient capacity to raise the personnel back to the boarding level.

1910.66(g)(6)

(h) Maintenance.1910.66(h) (1) General maintenance. All parts of the equipment affecting safe operation shall be maintained in proper working order so that they may perform the functions for which they were intended. The equipment shall be taken out of service when it is not in proper working order. 1910.66(h)(1) (2) Cleaning. 1910.66(h)(2) (i) Control or power contactors and relays shall be kept clean.

1910.66(h)(2)(i)

(ii) All other parts shall be kept clean if their proper functioning would be affected by the presence of dirt or other contaminants. 1910.66(h)(2)(ii) (3) Periodic resocketing of wire rope fastenings. 1910.66(h)(3) (i) Hoisting ropes utilizing poured socket fastenings shall be resocketed at the non-drum ends at intervals not exceeding 24 months. In resocketing the ropes, a sufficient length shall be cut from the end of the rope to remove damaged or fatigued portions. 1910.66(h)(3)(i) (ii) Resocketed ropes shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (f)(7) of this section. 1910.66(h)(3)(ii) (iii) Limit switches affected by the resocketed ropes shall be reset, if necessary. 1910.66(h)(3)(iii) (4) Periodic reshackling of suspension wire ropes. The hoisting ropes shall be reshackled at the nondrum ends at intervals not exceeding 24 months. When reshackling the ropes, a sufficient length shall be cut from the end of the rope to remove damaged or fatigued portions. 1910.66(h)(4) (5) Roof systems. Roof track systems, tie-downs, or similar equipment shall be maintained in proper working order so that they perform the function for which they were intended. 1910.66(h)(5)

(6) Building face guiding members. T-rails, indented mullions, or equivalent guides located in the face of a building shall be maintained in proper working order so that they perform the functions for which they were intended. Brackets for cable stabilizers shall similarly be maintained in proper working order. 1910.66(h)(6) (7) Inoperative safety devices. No person shall render a required safety device or electrical protective device inoperative, except as necessary for tests, inspections, and maintenance. Immediately upon completion of such tests, inspections and maintenance, the device shall be restored to its normal operating condition.

1910.66(h)(7)

(i) Operations.1910.66(i) (1) Training. 1910.66(i)(1) (i) Working platforms shall be operated only by persons who are proficient in the operation, safe use and inspection of the particular working platform to be operated. 1910.66(i)(1)(i) (ii) All employees who operate working platforms shall be trained in the following: 1910.66(i)(1)(ii) [A] Recognition of, and preventive measures for, the safety hazards associated with their individual work tasks.

1910.66(i)(1)(ii)[A]

[B] General recognition and prevention of safety hazards associated with the use of working platforms, including the provisions in the section relating to the particular working platform to be operated. 1910.66(i)(1)(ii)[B] [C] Emergency action plan procedures required in paragraph (e)(9) of this section. 1910.66(i)(1)(ii)[C] [D] Work procedures required in paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section. 1910.66(i)(1)(ii)[D] [E] Personal fall arrest system inspection, care, use and system performance. 1910.66(i)(1)(ii)[E] (iii) Training of employees in the operation and inspection of working platforms shall be done by a competent person.

1910.66(i)(1)(iii)

(iv) Written work procedures for the operation, safe use and inspection of working platforms shall be provided for employee training. Pictorial methods of instruction, may be used, in lieu of written work procedures, if employee communication is improved using this method. The operating manuals supplied by manufacturers for platform system components can serve as the basis for these procedures. 1910.66(i)(1)(iv) (v) The employer shall certify that employees have been trained in operating and inspecting a working platform by preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training and the date that training was completed. The certification record shall be prepared at the completion of the training required in paragraph (i)(1)(ii) of this section, and shall be maintained in a file for the duration of the employee's employment.

The certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative. 1910.66(i)(1)(v) (2) Use. 1910.66(i)(2) (i) Working platforms shall not be loaded in excess of the rated load, as stated on the platform load rating plate. 1910.66(i)(2)(i) (ii) Employees shall be prohibited from working on snow, ice, or other slippery material covering platforms, except for the removal of such materials. 1910.66(i)(2)(ii) (iii) Adequate precautions shall be taken to protect the platform, wire ropes and life lines from damage due to acids or other corrosive substances, in accordance with the recommendations of the corrosive substance producer, supplier, platform manufacturer or other equivalent information sources. Platform members which have been exposed to acids or other corrosive substances shall be washed down with a neutralizing solution, at a frequency recommended by the corrosive substance producer or supplier. 1910.66(i)(2)(iii) (iv) Platform members, wire ropes and life lines shall be protected when using a heat producing process. Wire ropes and life lines which have been contacted by the heat producing process shall be considered to be permanently damaged and shall not be used. 1910.66(i)(2)(iv) (v) The platform shall not be operated in winds in excess of 25 miles per hour (40.2 km/hr) except to move it from an operating to a storage position. Wind speed shall be determined based on the best available information, which includes on-site anemometer readings and local weather forecasts which predict wind velocities for the area. 1910.66(i)(2)(v) (vi) On exterior installations, an anemometer shall be mounted on the platform to provide information of on-site wind velocities prior to and during the use of the platform. The anemometer may be a portable (hand held) unit which is temporarily mounted during platform use. 1910.66(i)(2)(vi)

19

1910 General Industry Standards

(i) Suspension wire rope shall be maintained and used in accordance with procedures recommended by the wire rope manufacturer. 1910.66(g)(5)(i) (ii) Suspension wire rope shall be inspected by a competent person for visible defects and gross damage to the rope before every use and after each occurrence which might affect the wire rope's integrity. 1910.66(g)(5)(ii) (iii) A thorough inspection of suspension wire ropes in service shall be made once a month. Suspension wire ropes that have been inactive for 30 days or longer shall have a thorough inspection before they are placed into service. These thorough inspections of suspension wire ropes shall be performed by a competent person. 1910.66(g)(5)(iii) (iv) The need for replacement of a suspension wire rope shall be determined by inspection and shall be based on the condition of the wire rope. Any of the following conditions or combination of conditions will be cause for removal of the wire rope:

§1910.66(i)

Appendix A

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards

(vii) Tools, materials and debris not related to the work in progress shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms. Stabilizer ties shall be located so as to allow unencumbered passage along the full length of the platform and shall be of such length so as not to become entangled in rollers, hoists or other machinery.

1910.66(i)(2)(vii)

(j) Personal fall protection. Employees on working platforms shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system meeting the requirements of subpart I of this part and as otherwise provided by this standard. 1910.66(j)

Appendix A §1910.66, Guidelines (Advisory)

1. Use of the Appendix. Appendix A provides examples of equipment and methods to assist the employer in meeting the requirements of the indicated provision of the standard.

Employers may use other equipment or procedures which conform to the requirements of the standard. This appendix neither adds to nor detracts from the mandatory requirements set forth in §1910.66.

2. Assurance. Paragraph (c) of the standard requires the building owner to inform the employer in writing that the powered platform installation complies with certain requirements of the standard, since the employer may not have the necessary information to make these determinations. The employer, however, remains responsible for meeting these requirements which have not been set off in paragraph (c)(1).

3. Design Requirements. The design requirements for each installation should be based on the limitations (stresses, deflections, etc.), established by nationally recognized standards as promulgated by the following organizations, or to equivalent standards: AA — The Aluminum Association, 818 Connecticut Avenue, NW., Washington, DC, 20006 Aluminum Construction Manual Specifications For Aluminum Structures Aluminum Standards and Data AGMA — American Gear Manufacturers Association, 101 North Fort Meyer Dr., Suite 1000, Arlington, VA 22209 AISC — American Institute of Steel Construction, 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611 ANSI — American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018 ASCE — American Society of Civil Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 ASME — American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWS — American Welding Society, Inc., Box 351040, 550 NW. LeJeunne Road, Miami, FL 33126 JIC — Joint Industrial Council, 2139 Wisconsin Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20007 NEMA — National Electric Manufacturers Association, 2101 L Street, NW., Washington, DC 20037 4. Tie-in-guides. Indented mullions, T-rails or other equivalent guides are acceptable as tie-in guides in a building face for a continuous stabilization system. Internal guides are embedded in other building members with only the opening exposed (see Figure 1 of appendix B). External guides, however, are installed external to the other building members and so are fully exposed. The minimum opening for tie-in guides is three-quarters of an inch (19 mm), and the minimum inside dimensions are one-inch (25 mm) deep and two inches (50 mm) wide.

Employers should be aware of the hazards associated with tiein guides in a continuous stabilization system which was not designed properly. For example, joints in these track systems may become extended or discontinuous due to installation or building settlement. If this alignment problem is not corrected, the system could jam when a guide roller or guide shoe strikes a joint and this would cause a hazardous situation for employees. In another instance, faulty design will result in guide rollers being mounted in a line so they will jam in the track at the slightest misalignment.

5. Building anchors (intermittent stabilization system). In the selection of the vertical distance between building anchors, certain factors should be given consideration. These factors include building height and architectural design, platform length and weight, wire rope angulation, and the wind velocities in the building area. Another factor to consider is the material of the building face, since this material may be adversely affected by the building rollers.

External or indented type building anchors are acceptable.

Receptacles in the building facade used for the indented type should be kept clear of extraneous materials which will hinder their use. During the inspection of the platform installation, evi-

20

dence of a failure or abuse of the anchors should be brought to the attention of the employer.

6. Stabilizer tie length. A stabilizer tie should be long enough to provide for the planned angulation of the suspension cables.

However, the length of the tie should not be excessive and become a problem by possibly becoming entangled in the building face rollers or parts of the platform machinery.

The attachment length may vary due to material elongation and this should be considered when selecting the material to be used. Consideration should also be given to the use of ties which are easily installed by employees, since this will encourage their use.

7. Intermittent stabilization system. Intermittent stabilization systems may use different equipment, tie-in devices and methods to restrict the horizontal movement of a powered platform with respect to the face of the building. One acceptable method employs corrosion-resistant building anchors secured in the face of the building in vertical rows every third floor or 50 feet (15.3 m), whichever is less. The anchors are spaced horizontally to allow a stabilization attachment (stabilizer tie) for each of the two platform suspension wire ropes. The stabilizer tie consists of two parts. One part is a quick connect-quick disconnect device which utilizes a corrosion-resistant yoke and retainer spring that is designed to fit over the building anchors.

The second part of the stabilizer tie is a lanyard which is used to maintain a fixed distance between the suspension wire rope and the face of the building.

In this method, as the suspended powered platform descends past the elevation of each anchor, the descent is halted and each of the platform occupants secures a stabilizer tie between a suspension wire rope and a building anchor. The procedure is repeated as each elevation of a building anchor is reached during the descent of the powered platform.

As the platform ascends, the procedure is reversed; that is, the stabilizer ties are removed as each elevation of a building anchor is reached. The removal of each stabilizer tie is assured since the platform is provided with stopping devices which will interrupt power to its hoist(s) in the event either stopping device contacts a stabilizer during the ascent of the platform.

Figure 2 of appendix B illustrates another type of acceptable intermittent stabilization system which utilizes retaining pins as the quick connect-quick disconnect device in the stabilizer tie.

8. Wire Rope Inspection. The inspection of the suspension wire rope is important since the rope gradually loses strength during its useful life. The purpose of the inspection is to determine whether the wire rope has sufficient integrity to support a platform with the required design factor.

If there is any doubt concerning the condition of a wire rope or its ability to perform the required work, the rope should be replaced. The cost of wire rope replacement is quite small if compared to the cost in terms of human injuries, equipment down time and replacement.

No listing of critical inspection factors, which serve as a basis for wire rope replacement in the standard, can be a substitute for an experienced inspector of wire rope. The listing serves as a user's guide to the accepted standards by which ropes must be judged.

Rope life can be prolonged if preventive maintenance is performed regularly. Cutting off an appropriate length of rope at the end termination before the core degrades and valley breaks appear minimizes degradation at these sections.

9. General Maintenance. In meeting the general maintenance requirement in paragraph (h)(1) of the standard, the employer should undertake the prompt replacement of broken, worn and damaged parts, switch contacts, brushes, and short flexible conductors of electrical devices. The components of the electrical service system and traveling cables should be replaced when damaged or significantly abraded. In addition, gears, shafts, bearings, brakes and hoisting drums should be kept in proper alignment.

10. Training. In meeting the training requirement of paragraph (i)(1) of the standard, employers should use both on the job training and formal classroom training. The written work procedures used for this training should be obtained from the manufacturer, if possible, or prepared as necessary for the employee's information and use.

Employees who will operate powered platforms with intermittent stabilization systems should receive instruction in the specific ascent and descent procedures involving the assembly and disassembly of the stabilizer ties.

An acceptable training program should also include employee instruction in basic inspection procedures for the purpose of determining the need for repair and replacement of platform equipment. In addition, the program should cover the inspection, care and use of the personal fall protection equipment required in paragraph (j)(1) of the standard.

§1910.66 — Exhibits (Advisory)

Appendix B §1910.66 — Exhibits (Advisory)

The three drawings in appendix B illustrate typical platform stabilization systems which are addressed in the standard. The drawings are to be used for reference purposes only, and do not illustrate all the mandatory requirements for each system.

A

Indented Mullion Guide System

1910

STABILIZER INSERT VERTICALLY SPACED EVERY THIRD FLOOR RETAINING PIN

STABILIZER TIE

General Industry Standards

In addition, the training program should also include emergency action plan elements. OSHA brochure #1B3088 (Rev.) 1985, "How to Prepare for Workplace Emergencies," details the basic steps needed to prepare to handle emergencies in the workplace.

Following the completion of a training program, the employee should be required to demonstrate competency in operating the equipment safely. Supplemental training of the employee should be provided by the employer, as necessary, if the equipment used or other working conditions should change.

An employee who is required to work with chemical products on a platform should receive training in proper cleaning procedures, and in the hazards, care and handling of these products.

In addition, the employee should be supplied with the appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves and eye and face protection.

11. Suspension and Securing of Powered Platforms (Equivalency). One acceptable method of demonstrating the equivalency of a method of suspending or securing a powered platform, as required in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii), (f)(3) and (f)(5)(i)(F), is to provide an engineering analysis by a registered professional engineer. The analysis should demonstrate that the proposed method will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than any one of the methods specified in the standard.

Appendix B11.

SUSPENSION WIRE ROPE

DETAIL OF INTERNAL TIE-IN SHOWN. EXTERNAL TIE-IN IS SIMILAR TO BUTTON GUIDE SYSTEM GUIDE BUTTON.

A

Suspension Wire Rope

A Suspension Wire Rope

Stabilizer Tie

Building Face Roller Limit Sensor Switch

Hoisting Machine

BUILDING FACE ROLLER

Life Lines

GUIDE ROLLERS ENGAGED TO INDENTED MULLION TRACK

Suspension Wire Ropes

FIGURE 2. - Typical Self-Powered Platform - Intermittent Tie-In System GUIDE BUTTON ON FACE OF BUILDING GUIDE TRACK ATTACHED TO PLATFORM

A Building Face Roller

Flared Out Ends

A

Suspension Wire Rope

Guide Buttons On Face of BuildingLocated In Vertical Rows

Guide Tracks Suspension Wire Rope

A Hoisting Machine

Indented Mullion Guide

Life Lines

FIGURE 1. - Typical Self-Powered Platform - Continuous External or

Hoisting Machine

NOTE: Guide Track Engages Two Guide Buttons At All Times

Life Lines

FIGURE 3. - Typical Self-Powered Platform - Button Guide System

21

Appendix C

Selected 1910 General Industry Standards

Appendix C [Reserved] Appendix D §1910.66 — Existing Installations (Mandatory)

USE OF THE APPENDIX Appendix D sets out the mandatory building and equipment requirements for applicable permanent installations completed after August 27, 1971, and no later than July 23, 1990 which are exempt from the paragraphs (a), (b)(1), (b)(2), (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this standard. The requirements in appendix D are essentially the same as unrevised building and equipment provisions which previously were designated as 29 CFR 1910.66 (a), (b), (c) and (d) and which were effective on August 27, 1971.

Note: All existing installations subject to this appendix shall also comply with paragraphs (g), (h), (i), (j) and appendix C of the standard 29 CFR 1910.66.

(a) Definitions applicable to this appendix.

(1) Angulated roping. A system of platform suspension in which the upper wire rope sheaves or suspension points are closer to the plane of the building face than the corresponding attachment points on the platform, thus causing the platform to press against the face of the building during its vertical travel.

(2) ANSI. American National Standards Institute.

(3) Babbitted fastenings. The method of providing wire rope attachments in which the ends of the wire strands are bent back and are held in a tapered socket by means of poured molten babbitt metal.

(4) Brake — disc type. A brake in which the holding effect is obtained by frictional resistance between one or more faces of discs keyed to the rotating member to be held and fixed discs keyed to the stationary or housing member (pressure between the discs being applied axially).

(5) Brake — self-energizing band type. An essentially undirectional brake in which the holding effect is obtained by the snubbing action of a flexible band wrapped about a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed to the rotating member to be held, the connections and linkages being so arranged that the motion of the brake wheel or drum will act to increase the tension or holding force of the band.

(6) Brake — shoe type. A brake in which the holding effect is obtained by applying the direct pressure of two or more segmental friction elements held to a stationary member against a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed to the rotating member to be held.

(7) Building face rollers. A specialized form of guide roller designed to contact a portion of the outer face or wall structure of the building, and to assist in stabilizing the operators' platform during vertical travel.

(8) Continuous pressure. Operation by means of buttons or switches, any one of which may be used to control the movement of the working platform or roof car, only as long as the button or switch is manually maintained in the actuating position.

(9) Control. A system governing starting, stopping, direction, acceleration, speed, and retardation of moving members.

(10) Controller. A device or group of devices, usually contained in a single enclosure, which serves to control in some predetermined manner the apparatus to which it is connected.

(11) Electrical ground. A conducting connection between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or some conducting body which serves in place of the earth.

(12) Guide roller. A rotating, bearing-mounted, generally cylindrical member, operating separately or as part of a guide shoe assembly, attached to the platform, and providing rolling contact with building guideways, or other building contact members.

(13) Guide shoe. An assembly of rollers, slide members, or the equivalent, attached as a unit to the operators' platform, and designed to engage with the building members provided for the vertical guidance of the operators' platform.

(14) Interlock. A device actuated by the operation of some other device with which it is directly associated, to govern succeeding operations of the same or allied devices.

(15) Operating device. A pushbutton, lever, or other manual device used to actuate a control.

(16) Powered platform. Equipment to provide access to the exterior of a building for maintenance, consisting of a suspended power-operated working platform, a roof car, or other suspension means, and the requisite operating and control devices.

(17) Rated load. The combined weight of employees, tools, equipment, and other material which the working platform is designed and installed to lift.

22

(18) Relay, direction. An electrically energized contactor responsive to an initiating control circuit, which in turn causes a moving member to travel in a particular direction.

(19) Relay, potential for vertical travel. An electrically energized contactor responsive to initiating control circuit, which in turn controls the operation of a moving member in both directions. This relay usually operates in conjunction with direction relays, as covered under the definition, "relay, direction."

(20) Roof car. A structure for the suspension of a working platform, providing for its horizontal movement to working positions.

(21) Roof-powered platform. A powered platform having the raising and lowering mechanism located on a roof car.

(22) Self-powered platform. A powered platform having the raising and lowering mechanism located on the working platform.

(23) Traveling cable. A cable made up of electrical or communication conductors or both, and providing electrical connection between the working platform and the roof car or other fixed point.

(24) Weatherproof. Equipment so constructed or protected that exposure to the weather will not interfere with its proper operation.

(25) Working platform. The suspended structure arranged for vertical travel which provides access to the exterior of the building or structure.

(26) Yield point. The stress at which the material exhibits a permanent set of 0.2 percent.

(27) Zinced fastenings. The method of providing wire rope attachments in which the splayed or fanned wire ends are held in a tapered socket by means of poured molten zinc. (b) General requirements.

(1) Design requirements. All powered platform installations for exterior building maintenance completed as of August 27, 1971, but no later than [insert date, 180 days after the effective date], shall meet all of the design, construction and installation requirements of Part II and III of the "American National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance ANSI A120.11970" and of this appendix. References shall be made to appropriate parts of ANSI A120.1-1970 for detail specifications for equipment and special installations.

(2) Limitation. The requirements of this appendix apply only to electric powered platforms. It is not the intent of this appendix to prohibit the use of other types of power. Installation of powered platforms using other types of power is permitted, provided such platforms have adequate protective devices for the type of power used, and otherwise provide for reasonable safety of life and limb to users of equipment and to others who may be exposed.

(3) Types of powered platforms. (i) For the purpose of applying this appendix, powered platforms are divided into two basic types, Type F and Type T. (ii) Powered platforms designated as Type F shall meet all the requirements in Part II of ANSI A 120.1-1970, American National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance. A basic requirement of Type F equipment is that the work platform is suspended by at least four wire ropes and designed so that failure of any one wire rope will not substantially alter the normal position of the working platform. Another basic requirement of Type F equipment is that only one layer of hoisting rope is permitted on winding drums. Type F powered platforms may be either roof-powered or self-powered. (iii) Powered platforms designated as Type T shall meet all the requirements in Part III of ANSI A120.1-1970 American National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance, except for section 28, Safety Belts and Life Lines. A basic requirement of Type T equipment is that the working platform is suspended by at least two wire ropes. Failure of one wire rope would not permit the working platform to fall to the ground, but would upset its normal position. Type T powered platforms may be either roof-powered or self-powered. (iv) The requirements of this section apply to powered platforms with winding drum type hoisting machines. It is not the intent of this section to prohibit powered platforms using other types of hoisting machines such as, but not limited to, traction drum hoisting machines, air powered machines, hydraulic powered machines, and internal combustion machines. Installation of powered platforms with other types of hoisting machines is permitted, provided adequate protective devices are used, and provided reasonable safety of life and limb to users of the equipment and to others who may be exposed is assured. (v) Both Type F and Type T powered platforms shall comply with the requirements of appendix C of this standard. (c) Type F powered platforms.

(1) Roof car, general. (i) A roof car shall be provided whenever it is necessary to move the working platform horizontally to working or storage positions.

Selected 1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

Selected 1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

(2) All vertical and horizontal members shall be fastened together with a coupler or locking device which will form a positive connection.

The locking device shall be of a type which has no loose parts.

§1915.71

(3) Posts shall be kept plumb during erection and the scaffold shall be subsequently kept plumb and rigid by means of adequate bracing.

Scaffolds or staging

(a) Scope and application. The provisions of this section shall apply to all ship repairing, shipbuilding and shipbreaking operations except that paragraphs (b)(8) through (b)(10) and paragraphs (c) through (f) of this section shall only apply to ship repairing and shipbuilding operations and shall not apply to shipbreaking.

1915.71(a)

1915.71(b)(4)

(5) Scaffolds shall be maintained in a safe and secure condition. Any component of the scaffold which is broken, burned or otherwise defective shall be replaced.1915.71(b)(5) (6) Barrels, boxes, cans, loose bricks, or other unstable objects shall not be used as working platforms or for the support of planking intended as scaffolds or working platforms.1915.71(b)(6) (7) No scaffold shall be erected, moved, dismantled or altered except under the supervision of competent persons.1915.71(b)(7) (8) No welding, burning, riveting or open flame work shall be performed on any staging suspended by means of fiber rope.

1915.71(b)(8)

(9) Lifting bridles on working platforms suspended from cranes shall consist of four legs so attached that the stability of the platform is assured.1915.71(b)(9) (10) Unless the crane hook has a safety latch or is moused, the lifting bridles on working platforms suspended from cranes shall be attached by shackles to the lower lifting block or other positive means shall be taken to prevent them from becoming accidentally disengaged from the crane hook.1915.71(b)(10) (c) Independent pole wood scaffolds.1915.71(c) (1) All pole uprights shall be set plump. Poles shall rest on a foundation of sufficient size and strength to distribute the loan and to prevent displacement.1915.71(c)(1) (2) In light-duty scaffolds, not more than 24 feet in height, poles may be spliced by overlapping the ends not less than 4 feet and securely nailing them together. A substantial cleat shall be nailed to the lower section to form a support for the upper section except when bolted connections are used.1915.71(c)(2) (3) All other poles to be spliced shall be squared at the ends of each splice, abutted, and rigidly fastened together by not less than two cleats securely nailed or bolted thereto. Each cleat shall overlap each pole end by at least 24 inches and shall have a width equal to the face of the pole to which it is attached. The combined cross sectional area of the cleats shall be not less than the cross sectional area of the pole.1915.71(c)(3) (4) Ledgers shall extend over two consecutive pole spaces and shall overlap the poles at each end by not less than 4 inches. They shall be left in position to brace the poles as the platform is raised with the progress of the work. Ledgers shall be level and shall be securely nailed or bolted to each pole and shall be placed against the inside face of each pole.1915.71(c)(4) (5) All bearers shall be set with their greater dimension vertical and shall extend beyond the ledgers upon which they rest.1915.71(c)(5) (6) Diagonal bracing shall be provided between the parallel poles, and cross bracing shall be provided between the inner and outer poles or from the outer poles to the ground.1915.71(c)(6) (7) Minimum dimensions and spacing of members shall be in accordance with Table E-1 in §1915.118.1915.71(c)(7) (8) Platform planking shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (i) of this section.1915.71(c)(8) (9) Backrails and toeboards shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section.1915.71(c)(9) (d) Independent pole metal scaffolds.1915.71(d) (1) Metal scaffold members shall be maintained in good repair and free of corrosion.1915.71(d)(1)

1915.71(d)(3)

(4) Posts shall be fitted with bases supported on a firm foundation to distribute the load. When wooden sills are used, the bases shall be fastened thereto.1915.71(d)(4) (5) Bearers shall be located at each set of posts, at each level, and at each intermediate level where working platforms are installed.

1915.71(d)(5)

(6) Tubular bracing shall be applied both lengthwise and crosswise as required.1915.71(d)(6) (7) Platform planking shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.1915.71(d)(7) (8) Backrails and toeboards shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section.1915.71(d)(8) (e) Wood trestle and extension trestle ladders.1915.71(e) (1) The use of trestle ladders, or extension sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders longer than 20 feet is prohibited. The total height of base and extension may, however, be more than 20 feet.1915.71(e)(1) (2) The minimum dimensions of the side rails of the trestle ladder, or the base sections of the extension trestle ladder, shall be as follows:1915.71(e)(2) (i) Ladders up to and including those 16 feet long shall have side rails of not less than 15⁄16 × 23⁄4 inch lumber.1915.71(e)(2)(i) (ii) Ladders over 16 feet long and up to and including those 20 feet long shall have side rails of not less than 15⁄16 × 3 inch lumber.

1915.71(e)(2)(ii)

(3) The side rails of the extension section of the extension trestle ladder shall be parallel and shall have minimum dimensions as follows:1915.71(e)(3) (i) Ladders up to and including 12 feet long shall have side rails of not less than 15⁄16 × 21⁄4 inch lumber.1915.71(e)(3)(i) (ii) Ladders over 12 feet long and up to and including those 16 feet long shall have side rails of not less than 15⁄16 × 21⁄2 inch lumber.1915.71(e)(3)(ii) (iii) Ladders over 16 feet long and up to and including those 20 feet long shall have side rails of not less than 15⁄16 × 23⁄4 inch lumber.1915.71(e)(3)(iii) (4) Trestle ladders and base sections of extension trestle ladders shall be so spread that when in an open position the spread of the trestle at the bottom, inside to inside, shall be not less than 51⁄2 inches per foot of the length of the ladder.1915.71(e)(4) (5) The width between the side rails at the bottom of the trestle ladder or of the base section of the extension trestle ladder shall be not less than 21 inches for all ladders and sections 6 feet or less in length. For longer lengths of ladder, the width shall be increased at least 1 inch for each additional foot of length. The width between the side rails of the extension section of the trestle ladder shall be not less than 12 inches.1915.71(e)(5) (6) In order to limit spreading, the top ends of the side rails of both the trestle ladder and of the base section of the extension trestle ladder shall be beveled, or of equivalent construction, and shall be provided with a metal hinge.1915.71(e)(6) (7) A metal spreader or locking device to hold the front and back sections in an open position, and to hold the extension section securely in the elevated position, shall be a component of each trestle ladder or extension ladder.1915.71(e)(7) (8) Rungs shall be parallel and level. On the trestle ladder, or on the base section of the extension trestle ladder, rungs shall be spaced not less than 8 inches nor more than 18 inches apart; on the extension section of the extension trestle ladder, rungs shall be spaced not less than 6 inches nor more than 12 inches apart.

1915.71(e)(8)

(9) Platform planking shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (i) of this section, except that the width of the platform planking shall not exceed the distance between the side rails.

1915.71(e)(9)

(10) Backrails and toeboards shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section.1915.71(e)(10) (f) Painters' suspended scaffolds.1915.71(f) (1) The supporting hooks of swinging scaffolds shall be constructed to be equivalent in strength to mild steel or wrought iron, shall be forged with care, shall be not less than 7⁄8 inch in diameter, and shall be secured to a safe anchorage at all times.1915.71(f)(1)

1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

(b) General requirements.1915.71(b) (1) All scaffolds and their supports whether of lumber, steel or other material, shall be capable of supporting the load they are designed to carry with a safety factor of not less than four (4).1915.71(b)(1) (2) All lumber used in the construction of scaffolds shall be spruce, fir, long leaf yellow pine, Oregon pine or wood of equal strength. The use of hemlock, short leaf yellow pine, or short fiber lumber is prohibited.1915.71(b)(2) (3) Lumber dimensions as given in this subpart are nominal except where given in fractions of an inch.1915.71(b)(3) (4) All lumber used in the construction of scaffolds shall be sound, straight-grained, free from cross grain, shakes and large, loose or dead knots. It shall also be free from dry rot, large checks, worm holes or other defects which impair its strength or durability.

1915.71(d)(2)

§1915.71

Selected 1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

(2) The ropes supporting a swinging scaffold shall be equivalent in strength to first-grade 3⁄4 inch diameter manila rope properly rigged into a set of standard 6 inch blocks consisting of at least one double and one single block.1915.71(f)(2) (3) Manila and wire ropes shall be carefully examined before each operation and thereafter as frequently as may be necessary to ensure their safe condition.1915.71(f)(3) (4) Each end of the scaffold platform shall be supported by a wrought iron or mild steel stirrup or hanger, which in turn is supported by the suspension ropes.1915.71(f)(4) (5) Stirrups shall be constructed so as to be equivalent in strength to wrought iron 3⁄4 inch in diameter.1915.71(f)(5) (6) The stirrups shall be formed with a horizontal bottom member to support the platform, shall be provided with means to support the guardrail and midrail and shall have a loop or eye at the top for securing the supporting hook on the block.1915.71(f)(6) (7) Two or more swinging scaffolds shall not at any time be combined into one by bridging the distance between them with planks or any other form of platform.1915.71(f)(7) (8) No more than two persons shall be permitted to work at one time on a swinging scaffold built to the minimum specifications contained in this paragraph. Where heavier construction is used, the number of persons permitted to work on the scaffold shall be determined by the size and the safe working load of the scaffold.

1915.71(f)(8)

(9) Backrails and toeboards shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section.1915.71(f)(9) (10) The swinging scaffold platform shall be one of the three types described in paragraphs (f)(11), (12), and (13) of this section.

1915.71(f)(10)

(11) The ladder-type platform consists of boards upon a horizontal ladder-like structure, referred to herein as the ladder, the side rails of which are parallel. If this type of platform is used the following requirements shall be met.1915.71(f)(11) (i) The width between the side rails shall be no more than 20 inches.1915.71(f)(11)(i) (ii) The side rails of ladders in ladder-type platforms shall be equivalent in strength to a beam of clear straight-grained spruce of the dimensions contained in Table E-2 in §1915.118.

1915.71(f)(11)(ii)

(iii) The side rails shall be tied together with tie rods. The tie rods shall be not less than 5⁄16 inch in diameter, located no more than 5 feet apart, pass through the rails, and be riveted up tight against washers at both ends.1915.71(f)(11)(iii) (iv) The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak, ash, or hickory, not less than 11⁄8 inches diameter, with 7⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the side rails not less than 7⁄8 inch and shall be spaced no more than 18 inches on centers.1915.71(f)(11)(iv) (v) Flooring strips shall be spaced no more than 5⁄8 inch apart except at the side rails, where 1 inch spacing is permissible.

1915.71(f)(11)(v)

(vi) Flooring strips 1915.71(f)(11)(vi)

shall

be

cleated

on

their

undersides.

(12) The plank-type platform consists of planks supported on the stirrups or hangers. If this type of platform is used, the following requirements shall be met:1915.71(f)(12) (i) The planks of plank-type platforms shall be of not less than 2 × 10 inch lumber.1915.71(f)(12)(i) (ii) The platform shall be no more than 24 inches in width.

1915.71(f)(12)(ii)

(iii) The planks shall be tied together by cleats of not less than 1 × 6 inch lumber, nailed on their undersides at intervals of not more than 4 feet.1915.71(f)(12)(iii) (iv) The planks shall extend not less than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches beyond the supporting stirrups.1915.71(f)(12)(iv) (v) A cleat shall be nailed across the platform on the underside at each end outside the stirrup to prevent the platform from slipping off the stirrup.1915.71(f)(12)(v) (vi) Stirrup supports shall be not more than 10 feet apart.

1915.71(f)(12)(vi)

(13) The beam-type platform consists of longitudinal side stringers with cross beams set on edge and spaced not more than 4 feet apart on which longitudinal platform planks are laid. If this type platform is used, the following requirements shall be met: 1915.71(f)(13)

(i) The side stringers shall be of sound, straight-grained lumber, free from knots, and of not less than 2 × 6 inch lumber, set on edge.1915.71(f)(13)(i) (ii) The stringers shall be supported on the stirrups with a clear span between stirrups of not more than 16 feet.1915.71(f)(13)(ii)

36

(iii) The stringers shall be bolted to the stirrups by U-bolts passing around the stirrups and bolted through the stringers with nuts drawn up tight on the inside face.1915.71(f)(13)(iii) (iv) The ends of the stringers shall extend beyond the stirrups not less than 6 inches nor more than 12 inches at each end of the platform.1915.71(f)(13)(iv) (v) The platform shall be supported on cross beams of 2 × 6 inch lumber between the side stringers securely nailed thereto and spaced not more than 4 feet on centers.1915.71(f)(13)(v) (vi) The platform shall be not more than 24 inches wide.

1915.71(f)(13)(vi)

(vii) The platform shall be formed of boards 7⁄8 inch in thickness by not less than 6 inches in width, nailed tightly together, and extending to the outside face of the stringers.1915.71(f)(13)(vii) (viii) The ends of all platform boards shall rest on the top of the cross beams, shall be securely nailed, and at no intermediate points in the length of the platform shall there be any cantilever ends.1915.71(f)(13)(viii) (g) Horse scaffolds.1915.71(g) (1) The minimum dimensions of lumber used in the construction of horses shall be in accordance with Table E-3 in §1915.118.

1915.71(g)(1)

(2) Horses constructed of materials other than lumber shall provide the strength, rigidity and security required of horses constructed of lumber.1915.71(g)(2) (3) The lateral spread of the legs shall be equal to not less than onethird of the height of the horse.1915.71(g)(3) (4) All horses shall be kept in good repair, and shall be properly secured when used in staging or in locations where they may be insecure.1915.71(g)(4) (5) Platform planking shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (i) of this section.1915.71(g)(5) (6) Backrails and toeboards shall be in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section.1915.71(g)(6) (h) Other types of scaffolds.1915.71(h) (1) Scaffolds of a type for which specifications are not contained in this section shall meet the general requirements of paragraphs (b), (i), and (j) of this section, shall be in accordance with recognized principles of design and shall be constructed in accordance with accepted standards covering such equipment.1915.71(h)(1) (i) Scaffold or platform planking.1915.71(i) (1) Except as otherwise provided in paragraphs (f)(11) and (13) of this section, platform planking shall be of not less than 2 × 10 inch lumber. Platform planking shall be straight-grained and free from large or loose knots and may be either rough or dressed.1915.71(i)(1) (2) Platforms of staging shall be not less than two 10 inch planks in width except in such cases as the structure of the vessel or the width of the trestle ladders make it impossible to provide such a width.1915.71(i)(2) (3) Platform planking shall project beyond the supporting members at either end by at least 6 inches but in no case shall project more than 12 inches unless the planks are fastened to the supporting members.1915.71(i)(3) (4) Table E-4 in §1915.118 shall be used as a guide in determining safe loads for scaffold planks.1915.71(i)(4) (j) Backrails and toeboards.1915.71(j) (1)  Scaffolding, staging, runways, or working platforms which are supported or suspended more than 5 feet above a solid surface, or at any distance above the water, shall be provided with a railing which has a top rail whose upper surface is from 42 to 45 inches above the upper surface of the staging, platform, or runway and a midrail located halfway between the upper rail and the staging, platform, or runway.1915.71(j)(1) (2) Rails shall be of 2 × 4 inch lumber, flat bar or pipe. When used with rigid supports, taut wire or fiber rope of adequate strength may be used. If the distance between supports is more than 8 feet, rails shall be equivalent in strength to 2 × 4 inch lumber. Rails shall be firmly secured. Where exposed to hot work or chemicals, fiber rope rails shall not be used.1915.71(j)(2) (3) Rails may be omitted where the structure of the vessel prevents their use. When rails are omitted, employees working more than 5 feet above solid surfaces shall be protected by safety belts and life lines meeting the requirements of §§1915.159 and 1915.160, and employees working over water shall be protected by buoyant work vests meeting the requirements of §1915.158(a).1915.71(j)(3) (4) Employees working from swinging scaffolds which are triced out of a vertical line below their supports or from scaffolds on paint floats subject to surging, shall be protected against falling toward the vessel by a railing or a safety belt and line attached to the backrail.

1915.71(j)(4)

Access to vessels

§1915.72

Ladders

The provisions of this section shall apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding and shipbreaking. (a) General requirements.1915.72(a) (1) The use of ladders with broken or missing rungs or steps, broken or split side rails, or other faulty or defective construction is prohibited. When ladders with such defects are discovered, they shall be immediately withdrawn from service. Inspection of metal ladders shall include checking for corrosion of interiors of open end, hollow rungs.1915.72(a)(1) (2) When sections of ladders are spliced, the ends shall be abutted, and not fewer than 2 cleats shall be securely nailed or bolted to each rail. The combined cross sectional area of the cleats shall be not less than the cross sectional area of the side rail. The dimensions of side rails for their total length shall be those specified in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section.1915.72(a)(2) (3) Portable ladders shall be lashed, blocked or otherwise secured to prevent their being displaced. The side rails of ladders used for access to any level shall extend not less than 36 inches above that level. When this is not practical, grab rails which will provide a secure grip for an employee moving to or from the point of access shall be installed.1915.72(a)(3) (4) Portable metal ladders shall be of strength equivalent to that of wood ladders. Manufactured portable metal ladders provided by the employer shall be in accordance with the provisions of ANSI Standard A14.2-1972: Safety Requirements for Portable Metal Ladders (incorporated by reference, see §1915.5).1915.72(a)(4) (5) Portable metal ladders shall not be used near electrical conductors nor for electric arc welding operations.1915.72(a)(5) (6) Manufactured portable wood ladders provided by the employer shall be in accordance with the provisions of ANSI Standard A14.1-1975: Safety Requirements for Portable Wood Ladders (incorporated by reference, see §1915.5).1915.72(a)(6) (b) Construction of portable wood cleated ladders up to 30 feet in length.1915.72(b) (1) Wood side rails shall be made from West Coast hemlock, Eastern spruce, Sitka spruce, or wood of equivalent strength. Material shall be seasoned, straight-grained wood, and free from shakes, checks, decay or other defects which will impair its strength. The use of low density woods is prohibited.1915.72(b)(1) (2) Side rails shall be dressed on all sides and kept free of splinters.

1915.72(b)(2)

(3) All knots shall be sound and hard. The use of material containing loose knots is prohibited. Knots shall not appear on the narrow face of the rail and, when in the side face, shall be not more than 1 ⁄2 inch in diameter or within 1⁄2 inch of the edge of the rail or nearer than 3 inches to a tread or rung.1915.72(b)(3) (4) Pitch pockets not exceeding 1⁄8 inch in width, 2 inches in length and 1⁄2 inch in depth are permissible in wood side rails, provided that not more than one such pocket appears in each 4 feet of length.1915.72(b)(4) (5) The width between side rails at the base shall be not less than 111⁄2 inches for ladders 10 feet or less in length. For longer ladders this width shall be increased at least 1⁄4 inch for each additional 2 feet in length.1915.72(b)(5) (6) Side rails shall be at least 15⁄8 × 35⁄8 inches in cross section.

1915.72(b)(6)

(7) Cleats (meaning rungs rectangular in cross section with the wide dimension parallel to the rails) shall be of the material used for side rails, straight-grained and free from knots. Cleats shall be mortised into the edges of the side rails 1⁄2 inch, or filler blocks shall be used on the rails between the cleats. The cleats shall be secured to each rail with three 10d common wire nails or fastened with through bolts or other fasteners of equivalent strength. Cleats shall be uniformly spaced not more than 12 inches apart.1915.72(b)(7) (8) Cleats 20 inches or less in length shall be at least 25⁄32 × 3 inches in cross section. Cleats over 20 inches but not more than 30 inches in length shall be at least 25⁄32 × 33⁄4 inches in cross section.1915.72(b)(8) (c) Construction of portable wood cleated ladders from 30 to 60 feet in length.1915.72(c) (1) Ladders from 30 to 60 feet in length shall be in accordance with the specifications of paragraph (b) of this section with the following exceptions:1915.72(c)(1) (i) Rails shall be of not less than 2 × 6 inch lumber.1915.72(c)(1)(i) (ii) Cleats shall be of not less than 1 × 4 inch lumber.1915.72(c)(1)(ii) (iii) Cleats shall be nailed to each rail with five 10d common wire nails or fastened with through bolts or other fasteners of equivalent strength.1915.72(c)(1)(iii)

§1915.73

Guarding of deck openings and edges

(a) The provisions of this section shall apply to ship repairing and shipbuilding operations and shall not apply to shipbreaking.

1915.73(a)

(b) When employees are working in the vicinity of flush manholes and other small openings of comparable size in the deck and other working surfaces, such openings shall be suitably covered or guarded to a height of not less than 30 inches, except where the use of such guards is made impracticable by the work actually in progress. 1915.73(b) (c) When employees are working around open hatches not protected by coamings to a height of 24 inches or around other large openings, the edge of the opening shall be guarded in the working area to height of 36 to 42 inches, except where the use of such guards is made impracticable by the work actually in progress. 1915.73(c) (d)  When employees are exposed to unguarded edges of decks, platforms, flats, and similar flat surfaces, more than 5 feet above a solid surface, the edges shall be guarded by adequate guardrails meeting the requirements of §1915.71(j) (1) and (2), unless the nature of the work in progress or the physical conditions prohibit the use or installation of such guardrails. 1915.73(d) (e) When employees are working near the unguarded edges of decks of vessels afloat, they shall be protected by personal flotation devices, meeting the requirements of §1915.158(a).

1915.73(e)

(f) Sections of bilges from which floor plates or gratings have been removed shall be guarded by guardrails except where they would interfere with work in progress. If these open sections are in a walkway at least two 10-inch planks placed side by side, or equivalent, shall be laid across the opening to provide a safe walking surface. 1915.73(f) (g) Gratings, walkways, and catwalks, from which sections or ladders have been removed, shall be barricaded with adequate guardrails. 1915.73(g)

§1915.74

Access to vessels

(a) Access to vessels afloat. The employer shall not permit employees to board or leave any vessel, except a barge or river towboat, until the following requirements have been met: 1915.74(a) (1) Whenever practicable, a gangway of not less than 20 inches walking surface of adequate strength, maintained in safe repair and safely secured shall be used. If a gangway is not practicable, a substantial straight ladder, extending at least 36 inches above the upper landing surface and adequately secured against shifting or slipping shall be provided. When conditions are such that neither a gangway nor a straight ladder can be used, a Jacob's ladder meeting the requirements of paragraphs (d) (1) and (2) of this section may be used.1915.74(a)(1) (2) Each side of such gangway, and the turn table if used, shall have a railing with a minimum height of approximately 33 inches measured perpendicularly from rail to walking surface at the stanchion, with a midrail. Rails shall be of wood, pipe, chain, wire or rope and shall be kept taut at all times.1915.74(a)(2) (3) Gangways on vessels inspected and certificated by the U.S. Coast Guard are deemed to meet the foregoing requirements, except in cases where the vessel's regular gangway is not being used.1915.74(a)(3) (4) The gangway shall be kept properly trimmed at all times.

1915.74(a)(4)

37

1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

(5) When necessary, to prevent tools and materials from falling on men below, toeboards of not less than 1 × 4 inch lumber shall be provided.1915.71(j)(5) (k)  Access to staging.1915.71(k) (1) Access from below to staging more than 5 feet above a floor, deck or the ground shall consist of well secured stairways, cleated ramps, fixed or portable ladders meeting the applicable requirements of §1915.72 or rigid type non-collapsible trestles with parallel and level rungs.1915.71(k)(1) (2) Ramps and stairways shall be provided with 36-inch handrails with midrails.1915.71(k)(2) (3) Ladders shall be so located or other means shall be taken so that it is not necessary for employees to step more than one foot from the ladder to any intermediate landing or platform.1915.71(k)(3) (4) Ladders forming integral parts of prefabricated staging are deemed to meet the requirements of these regulations.1915.71(k)(4) (5) Access from above to staging more than 3 feet below the point of access shall consist of a straight, portable ladder meeting the applicable requirements of §1915.72 or a Jacob's ladder properly secured, meeting the requirements of §1915.74(d).1915.71(k)(5)

§1915.74(a)

§1915.76

Selected 1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

(5) When a fixed tread accommodations ladder is used, and the angle is low enough to require employees to walk on the edge of the treads, cleated duckboards shall be laid over and secured to the ladder.1915.74(a)(5) (6) When the lower end of a gangway overhangs the water between the ship and the dock in such a manner that there is danger of employees falling between the ship and the dock, a net or other suitable protection shall be rigged at the foot of the gangway in such a manner as to prevent employees from falling from the end of the gangway.1915.74(a)(6) (7) If the foot of the gangway is more than one foot away from the edge of the apron, the space between them shall be bridged by a firm walkway equipped with railings, with a minimum height of approximately 33 inches with midrails on both sides.1915.74(a)(7) (8) Supporting bridles shall be kept clear so as to permit unobstructed passage for employees using the gangway.1915.74(a)(8) (9) When the upper end of the means of access rests on or flush with the top of the bulwark, substantial steps properly secured and equipped with at least one substantial handrail approximately 33 inches in height shall be provided between the top of the bulwark and the deck.1915.74(a)(9) (10) Obstructions shall not be laid on or across the gangway.

1915.74(a)(10)

(11) The means of access shall be adequately illuminated for its full length.1915.74(a)(11) (12) Unless the construction of the vessel makes it impossible, the means of access shall be so located that drafts of cargo do not pass over it. In any event, loads shall not be passed over the means of access while employees are on it.1915.74(a)(12) (b) Access to vessels in drydock or between vessels.

Gangways meeting the requirements of paragraphs (a) (1), (2), (9), (10), (11) of this section shall be provided for access from wingwall to vessel or, when two or more vessels, other than barges or river towboats, are lying abreast, from one vessel to another.

1915.74(b)

(c) Access to barges and river towboats.1915.74(c) (1) Ramps for access of vehicles to or between barges shall be of adequate strength, provided with side boards, well maintained and properly secured.1915.74(c)(1) (2) Unless employees can step safely to or from the wharf, float, barge, or river towboat, either a ramp meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section or a safe walkway meeting the requirements of paragraph (a)(7) of this section shall be provided.

When a walkway is impracticable, a substantial straight ladder, extending at least 36 inches above the upper landing surface and adequately secured against shifting or slipping, shall be provided.

When conditions are such that neither a walkway nor a straight ladder can be used, a Jacob's ladder in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section may be used.

1915.74(c)(2)

(3) The means of access shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (a) (9), (10), and (11) of this section.

1915.74(c)(3)

(d) Jacob's ladders.1915.74(d) (1) Jacob's ladders shall be of the double rung or flat tread type. They shall be well maintained and properly secured.1915.74(d)(1) (2) A Jacob's ladder shall either hang without slack from its lashings or be pulled up entirely.1915.74(d)(2)

§1915.76

Access to cargo spaces and confined spaces

The provisions of this section apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding and shipbreaking except that paragraph (a)(4) of this section applies to ship repairing only. (a) Cargo spaces.1915.76(a) (1) There shall be at least one safe and accessible ladder in any cargo space which employees must enter.1915.76(a)(1) (2) When any fixed ladder is visibly unsafe, the employer shall prohibit its use by employees.1915.76(a)(2) (3) Straight ladders of adequate strength and suitably secured against shifting or slipping shall be provided as necessary when fixed ladders in cargo spaces do not meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(1) of this section. When conditions are such that a straight ladder cannot be used, a Jacob's ladder meeting the requirements of §1915.74(d) may be used.1915.76(a)(3) (4) When cargo is stowed within 4 inches of the back of ladder rungs, the ladder shall be deemed "unsafe" for the purpose of this section.1915.76(a)(4) (5) Fixed ladders or straight ladders provided for access to cargo spaces shall not be used at the same time that cargo drafts, equipment, materials, scrap or other loads are entering or leaving the hold. Before using these ladders to enter or leave the hold, the employee shall be required to inform the winchman or crane signalman of his intention.1915.76(a)(5)

38

(b) Confined spaces.1915.76(b) (1) More than one means of access shall be provided to a confined space in which employees are working and in which the work may generate a hazardous atmosphere in the space except where the structure or arrangement of the vessel makes this provision impractical.1915.76(b)(1) (2) When the ventilation ducts required by these regulations must pass through these means of access, the ducts shall be of such a type and so arranged as to permit free passage of an employee through at least two of these means of access.1915.76(b)(2)

§1915.77

Working surfaces

(a) Paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section shall apply to ship repairing and shipbuilding operations, and shall not apply to shipbreaking. Paragraph (e) of this section shall apply to shipbuilding, ship repairing and shipbreaking operations. 1915.77(a) (b) When firebox floors present tripping hazards of exposed tubing or of missing or removed refractory, sufficient planking to afford safe footing shall be laid while work is being carried on within the boiler. 1915.77(b) (c) When employees are working aloft, or elsewhere at elevations more than 5 feet above a solid surface, either scaffolds or a sloping ladder, meeting the requirements of this subpart, shall be used to afford safe footing, or the employees shall be protected by safety belts and lifelines meeting the requirements of §§1915.159 and 1915.160. Employees visually restricted by blasting hoods, welding helmets, and burning goggles shall work from scaffolds, not from ladders, except for the initial and final welding or burning operation to start or complete a job, such as the erection and dismantling of hung scaffolding, or other similar, nonrepetitive jobs of brief duration. 1915.77(c) (d) For work performed in restricted quarters, such as behind boilers and in between congested machinery units and piping, work platforms at least 20 inches wide meeting the requirements of §1915.71(i)(1) shall be used. Backrails may be omitted if bulkheading, boilers, machinery units, or piping afford proper protection against falling. 1915.77(d) (e) When employees are boarding, leaving, or working from small boats or floats, they shall be protected by personal flotation devices meeting the requirements of §1915.158(a). 1915.77(e)

§1915.159 Personal fall arrest systems (PFAS)

The criteria of this section apply to PFAS and their use. Effective January 1, 1998, body belts and non-locking snaphooks are not acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system. (a) Criteria for connectors and anchorages.1915.159(a) (1) Connectors shall be made of drop forged, pressed, or formed steel or shall be made of materials with equivalent strength.

1915.159(a)(1)

(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to the interfacing parts of the system.1915.159(a)(2) (3) D-rings and snaphooks shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.24 Kn).1915.159(a)(3) (4) D-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 Kn) without cracking, breaking, or being permanently deformed.1915.159(a)(4) (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook caused by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be of a locking type that is designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snap-hook by contact of the snaphook keeper by the connected member.

1915.159(a)(5)

(6) Snaphooks, unless of a locking type designed and used to prevent disengagement from the following connections, shall not be engaged:1915.159(a)(6) (i) Directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;1915.159(a)(6)(i) (ii) To each other;1915.159(a)(6)(ii) (iii) To a D-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached;1915.159(a)(6)(iii) (iv) To a horizontal lifeline; or1915.159(a)(6)(iv) (v) To any object that is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself.1915.159(a)(6)(v) (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work platforms with horizontal lifelines that may become vertical lifelines, the devices used for connection to the horizontal lifeline shall be capable of locking in any direction on the lifeline.1915.159(a)(7) (8) Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms.1915.159(a)(8)

Subpart I of Part 1915 – Testing Conditions for PFPS (9) Anchorages shall be capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.24 Kn) per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as follows:1915.159(a)(9) (i) As part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two; and1915.159(a)(9)(i) (ii) Under the direction and supervision of a qualified person.

1915.159(a)(9)(ii)

(b) Criteria for lifelines, lanyards, and personal fall arrest systems.

1915.159(b)

1915.159(b)(6)

(i) Limit the maximum arresting force on a falling employee to 900 pounds (4 Kn) when used with a body belt;1915.159(b)(6)(i) (ii) Limit the maximum arresting force on a falling employee to 1,800 pounds (8 Kn) when used with a body harness; 1915.159(b)(6)(ii)

(iii) Bring a falling employee to a complete stop and limit the maximum deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m), and1915.159(b)(6)(iii) (iv) Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.83 m), or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less;1915.159(b)(6)(iv) Note to paragraph (b)(6) of this section: A personal fall arrest system which meets the criteria and protocols contained in appendix B, is considered to comply with paragraph (b)(6). If the combined tool and body weight is 310 pounds (140.62 kg) or more, systems that meet the criteria and protocols contained in appendix B will be deemed to comply with the provisions of paragraph (b)(6) only if they are modified appropriately to provide protection for the extra weight of the employee and tools.

(7) Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.83 m) nor contact any lower level.1915.159(b)(7) (c) Criteria for selection, use and care of systems and system components.1915.159(c) (1) Lanyards shall be attached to employees using personal fall arrest systems, as follows:1915.159(c)(1) (i) The attachment point of a body harness shall be located in the center of the wearer's back near the shoulder level, or above the wearer's head. If the free fall distance is limited to less than 20 inches (50.8 cm), the attachment point may be located in the chest position; and1915.159(c)(1)(i) (ii) The attachment point of a body belt shall be located in the center of the wearer's back.1915.159(c)(1)(ii) (2) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, lifelines and strength components of body belts and body harnesses shall be made from synthetic fibers or wire rope.1915.159(c)(2) (3) Ropes, belts, harnesses, and lanyards shall be compatible with their hardware.1915.159(c)(3) (4) Lifelines and lanyards shall be protected against cuts, abrasions, burns from hot work operations and deterioration by acids, solvents, and other chemicals.1915.159(c)(4) (5) Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for mildew, wear, damage, and other deterioration. Defective components shall be removed from service.1915.159(c)(5) (6) Personal fall arrest systems and components subjected to impact loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection until inspected and determined by a qualified person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.1915.159(c)(6) (7) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the event of a fall or shall ensure that employees are able to rescue themselves.1915.159(c)(7) (8) Body belts shall be at least one and five-eighths inches (4.13 cm) wide.1915.159(c)(8)

(9) Personal fall arrest systems and components shall be used only for employee fall protection and not to hoist materials.1915.159(c)(9) (d) Training. Before using personal fall arrest equipment, each affected employee shall be trained to understand the application limits of the equipment and proper hook-up, anchoring, and tieoff techniques. Affected employees shall also be trained so that they can demonstrate the proper use, inspection, and storage of their equipment. 1915.159(d)

§1915.160 Positioning device systems

Positioning device systems and their use shall conform to the following provisions: (a) Criteria for connectors and anchorages.1915.160(a) (1) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of this system.1915.160(a)(1) (2) Connecting assemblies shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.24 Kn).1915.160(a)(2) (3) Positioning device systems shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall.1915.160(a)(3) (4) Snaphooks, unless each is of a locking type designed and used to prevent disengagement, shall not be connected to each other. As of January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used in positioning device systems.1915.160(a)(4) (b) Criteria for positioning device systems.1915.160(b) (1) Restraint (tether) lines shall have a minimum breaking strength of 3,000 pounds (13.34 Kn).1915.160(b)(1) (2) The following system performance criteria for positioning device systems are effective November 20, 1996:1915.160(b)(2) (i) A window cleaner's positioning system shall be capable of withstanding without failure a drop test consisting of a 6 foot (1.83 m) drop of a 250-pound (113.4 kg) weight. The system shall limit the initial arresting force to not more than 2,000 pounds (8.9 Kn), with a duration not to exceed 2 milliseconds. The system shall limit any subsequent arresting forces imposed on the falling employee to not more than 1,000 pounds (4.45 Kn); 1915.160(b)(2)(i)

(ii) All other positioning device systems shall be capable of withstanding without failure a drop test consisting of a 4 foot (1.22 m) drop of a 250-pound (113.4 kg) weight.1915.160(b)(2)(ii) Note to paragraph (b)(2) of this section: Positioning device systems which comply with the provisions of section 2 of non-mandatory appendix B to this subpart shall be deemed to meet the requirements of this paragraph (b)(2).

(c) Criteria for the use and care of positioning device systems.

1915.160(c)

(1) Positioning device systems shall be inspected before each use for mildew, wear, damage, and other deterioration. Defective components shall be removed from service.1915.160(c)(1) (2) A positioning device system or component subjected to impact loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection, unless inspected and determined by a qualified person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.1915.160(c)(2) (d) Training. Before using a positioning device system, employees shall be trained in the application limits, proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, methods of use, inspection, and storage of positioning device systems. 1915.160(d)

Appendix B Subpart I of Part 1915 — General Testing Conditions and Additional Guidelines for Personal Fall Protection Systems (NonMandatory)

1. Personal fall arrest systems — (a) General test conditions.

(1) Lifelines, lanyards, and deceleration devices should be attached to an anchorage and connected to the body-belt or body harness in the same manner as they would be when used to protect employees, except that lanyards should be tested only when connected directly to the anchorage, and not when connected to a lifeline.

(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and should not have a deflection greater than .04 inches (1 cm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10.01 Kn) is applied.

(3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation should be 100 Hz. (4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a rigid, metal cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96.5 cm plus or minus 10.16 cm).

Subpart I of Part 1915 – Testing Conditions for PFPS

39

1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

(1) When vertical lifelines are used, each employee shall be provided with a separate lifeline.1915.159(b)(1) (2) Vertical lifelines and lanyards shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.24 Kn).1915.159(b)(2) (3) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards that automatically limit free fall distances to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.34 Kn) applied to a selfretracting lifeline or lanyard with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position.1915.159(b)(3) (4) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards and tearing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum static tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.24 Kn) applied to the device when they are in the fully extended position.1915.159(b)(4) (5) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used under the supervision of a qualified person, and shall only be used as part of a complete personal fall arrest system that maintains a safety factor of at least two.1915.159(b)(5) (6) Effective November 20, 1996, personal fall arrest systems shall:

Appendix B1.

Appendix B

Selected 1915 Shipyard Employment Standards

(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance should be the one supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic lanyard or lifeline available to be used by the employee with the system.

(6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required level and should be quickly released without having any appreciable motion imparted to it.

(7) The system's performance should be evaluated, taking into account the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be used.

(8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation. (b) Strength test.

(1) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5 pounds (136.08 kg plus or minus 2.27 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (a)(4) above.)

(2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused system should be used for each test.

(3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5.08 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or harness.

(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the lifeline above the center line of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline's anchorage point should not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m).

(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, and for systems with deceleration devices which have a connection distance in excess of 1 foot (0.31 m) (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness), the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet (2.29 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (45.72 cm) above the anchorage point, to its hanging location (6 feet (1.83 m) below the anchorage). The test weight should fall without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or the ground during the test.

In some cases, a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length may need to be added to the system (for test purposes) to create the necessary free fall distance.

(6) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of four feet (1.22 m).

(7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness should constitute failure for the strength test. (c) Force test general. The test consists of dropping the respective test weight once. A new, unused system should be used for each test.

(1) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds (99.79 kg plus or minus 1.36 kg) should be used (see paragraph (a)(4) above). (ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5.08 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness. (iii) The test weight should fall free from the anchorage level to its handling location (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test.

(2) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (99.79 kg plus or minus 1.36 kg) should be used (see paragraph (a)(4) above). (ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the maximum fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal use conditions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (1.83 m), except as follows: (A) For deceleration systems which have a connection link or lanyard, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to the connection distance (measured between the center line of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness).

(B) For deceleration device systems with integral life lines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free fall a dis-

40

tance equal to that permitted by the system in normal use.

(For example, to test a system with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard, the test weight should be supported and the system allowed to retract the lifeline or lanyard as it would in normal use. The test weight would then be released and the force and deceleration distance measured.)

(3) Failure. A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting force exceeds 1,260 pounds (5.6 Kn) when using a body belt, or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.21 Kn) when using a body harness.

(4) Distances. The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be recorded during the force test. (d) Deceleration device tests — general. The device should be evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.) for which the device is designed.

(1) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 times over the same length of line a distance of not less than 1 foot (30.48 cm), and the mechanism should lock each time. (ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type of lifelines which must be used, several types (different diameters and different materials) of lifelines should be used to test the device.

(2) Other-self-activating-type deceleration devices. The locking mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices designed for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they would in normal service.

2. Positioning device systems — (a) Test Conditions.

(1) The fixed anchorage should be rigid and should not have a deflection greater than .04 inches (1.02 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10.01 Kn) is applied.

(2) For lineman's body belts and pole straps, the body belt should be secured to a 250 pound (113.4 kg) bag of sand at a point which simulates the waist of an employee. One end of the pole strap should be attached to the rigid anchorage and the other end to the body belt. The sand bag should be allowed to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m). Failure of the pole strap and body belt should be indicated by any breakage or slippage sufficient to permit the bag to fall free to the ground.

(3) For window cleaner's belts, the complete belt should withstand a drop test consisting of a 250 pound (113.4 kg) weight falling free for a distance of 6 feet (1.83 m). The weight should be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus four inches (96.52 cm plus or minus 10.16 cm.) The weight should be placed in the waistband with the belt buckle drawn firmly against the weight, as when the belt is worn by a window cleaner. One belt terminal should be attached to a rigid anchor and the other terminal should hang free. The terminals should be adjusted to their maximum span. The weight fastened in the freely suspended belt should then be lifted exactly 6 feet (1.83 m) above its "at rest" position and released so as to permit a free fall of 6 feet (1.83 m) vertically below the point of attachment of the terminal anchor. The belt system should be equipped with devices and instrumentation capable of measuring the duration and magnitude of the arrest forces. Any breakage or slippage which permits the weight to fall free of the system constitutes failure of the test.

In addition, the initial and subsequent arresting force peaks should be measured and should not exceed 2,000 pounds (8.9 Kn) for more than 2 milliseconds for the initial impact, nor exceed 1,000 pounds (4.45 Kn) for the remainder of the arrest time.

(4) All other positioning device systems (except for restraint line systems) should withstand a drop test consisting of a 250pound (113.4 kg) weight falling free for a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m). The weight should be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96.52 cm plus or minus 10.16 cm). The body belt or harness should be affixed to the test weight as it would be to an employee. The system should be connected to the rigid anchor in the manner that the system would be connected in normal use. The weight should be lifted exactly 4 feet (1.22 m) above its "at rest" position and released so as to permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.22 m).

Any breakage or slippage which permits the weight to fall free to the ground should constitute failure of the system.

Selected 1918 Longshoring Standards

Selected 1918 Longshoring Standards §1918.21

General requirements

The employer shall not permit employees to board or leave any vessel, except a barge or river towboat, until all of the applicable requirements of this subpart have been met. (a) If possible, the vessel's means of access shall be located so that suspended loads do not pass over it. In any event, suspended loads shall not be passed over the means of access while employees or others are on it. 1918.21(a) (b) When the upper end of the means of access rests on or is flush with the top of the bulwark, substantial steps, properly secured, trimmed and equipped with at least one substantial handrail, 33 inches (.84 m) in height, shall be provided between the top of the bulwark and the deck. 1918.21(b) (c) The means of access shall be illuminated for its full length in accordance with §1918.92.2 1918.21(c) 2

§1918.92 requires, along with other requirements, an average light intensity of five foot-candles (54 lux).

§1918.22

Gangways

1918.22(h)

(i) Handrails and walking surfaces of gangways shall be maintained in a safe condition to prevent employees from slipping or falling.

1918.22(i)

(j) Gangways on vessels inspected and certificated by the U.S. Coast Guard are deemed to meet the requirements of this section. 1918.22(j)

§1918.23

Jacob's ladders

(a) Jacob's ladders shall be of the double rung or flat tread type.

They shall be well maintained and properly secured. 1918.23(a) (b) A Jacob's ladder shall either hang without slack from its lashings or be pulled up entirely. 1918.23(b) (c) When a Jacob's ladder is used as the means of access to a barge being worked, spacers (bumpers) shall be hung between the vessel, barge, or other structure to which the barge is tied alongside, or other equally effective means shall be provided to prevent damage to the bottom rungs of the ladder. 1918.23(c) (d) When a Jacob's ladder is being used so that there is a danger of an employee falling or being crushed between the vessel, barge, or other structure (pier), suitable protection shall be provided.

1918.23(d)

Fixed and portable ladders

(a) There shall be at least one safe and accessible ladder for each gang working in a single hatch. An effective means of gaining a handhold shall be provided at or near the head of each vertical fixed ladder. No more than two ladders are required in any hatch regardless of the number of gangs present. 1918.24(a) (b) When any fixed ladder is visibly unsafe (or known to be unsafe), the employer shall identify such ladder and prohibit its use by employees. 1918.24(b) (c) Where portable straight ladders are used, they shall be of sufficient length to extend three feet (.91 m) above the upper landing surface, and be positively secured or held against shifting or slipping. When conditions are such that a straight ladder cannot be used, Jacob's ladders meeting the requirements of §1918.23 may be used. 1918.24(c) (d) For vessels built after July 16, 2001, when six inches (15.24 cm) or more clearance does not exist behind the rungs of a fixed ladder, the ladder shall be deemed "unsafe" for the purposes of this section. Alternate means of access (for example, a portable ladder) must be used. 1918.24(d) (e) (1) Where access to or from a stowed deckload or other cargo is needed and no other safe means is available, ladders or steps of adequate strength shall be furnished and positively secured or held against shifting or slipping while in use. Steps formed by the cargo itself are acceptable when the employer demonstrates that the nature of the cargo and the type of stowage provides equivalent safe access.1918.24(e)(1) (2) Where portable straight ladders are used they shall be of sufficient length to extend at least three feet (.91 m) above the upper landing surface.1918.24(e)(2) (f) The following standards for existing manufactured portable ladders must be met: 1918.24(f) (1) Rungs of manufactured portable ladders obtained before January 21, 1998 shall be capable of supporting a 200-pound (890 N) load without deformation.1918.24(f)(1) (2) Rungs shall be evenly spaced from nine to sixteen and one-half inches (22.9 to 41.9 cm), center to center.1918.24(f)(2) (3) Rungs shall be continuous members between rails. Each rung of a double-rung ladder (two side rails and a center rail) shall extend the full width of the ladder.1918.24(f)(3) (4) Width between side rails at the base of the ladder shall be at least 12 inches (30.48 cm) for ladders 10 feet (3.05 m) or less in overall length, and shall increase at least one-fourth inch (0.64 cm) for each additional two feet (0.61 m) of ladder length.1918.24(f)(4) (g) Portable manufactured ladders obtained after January 21, 1998 shall bear identification showing that they meet the appropriate ladder construction requirements of the following standards: 1918.24(g)

(1) ANSI A14.1-1990, Safety Requirements for Portable Wood Ladders;1918.24(g)(1) (2) ANSI A14.2-1990, Safety Requirements for Portable Metal Ladders;1918.24(g)(2) (3) ANSI A14.5-1992, Safety Requirements for Portable Reinforced Plastic Ladders.1918.24(g)(3) (h) Job-made ladders shall:1918.24(h) (1) Have a uniform distance between rungs of at least 12 inches (30.48cm) center to center;1918.24(h)(1) (2) Be capable of supporting a 250-pound (1,112 N) load without deformation; and1918.24(h)(2) (3) Have a minimum width between side rails of 12 inches (30.48 cm) for ladders 10 feet (3.05 m) or less in height. Width between rails shall increase at least one-fourth inch (0.64 cm) for each additional two feet (0.61 m) of ladder length.1918.24(h)(3) (i) The employer shall:1918.24(i) (1) Maintain portable ladders in safe condition. Ladders with the following defects shall not be used, and shall either be tagged as unusable if kept on board, or shall be removed from the vessel: 1918.24(i)(1)

(i) Broken, split or missing rungs, cleats or steps;1918.24(i)(1)(i) (ii) Broken or split side rails;1918.24(i)(1)(ii) (iii) Missing or loose bolts, rivets or fastenings;1918.24(i)(1)(iii) (iv) Defective ropes; or1918.24(i)(1)(iv) (v) Any other structural defect.1918.24(i)(1)(v) (2) Ladders shall be inspected for defects before each day's use, and after any occurrence, such as a fall, which could damage the ladder.1918.24(i)(2) (j) Ladders shall be used in the following manner:1918.24(j) (1) Ladders shall be securely positioned on a level and firm base.

1918.24(j)(1)

(2) Ladders shall be fitted with slip-resistant bases and/or be positively secured or held in place to prevent slipping or shifting while in use.1918.24(j)(2)

1918 Longshoring Standards

(a) Whenever practicable, a gangway of not less than 20 inches (.51 m) in width, of adequate strength, maintained in safe repair and safely secured shall be used. If a gangway is not practicable, a straight ladder meeting the requirements of §1918.24 that extends at least 36 inches (.91 m) above the upper landing surface and is secured against shifting or slipping shall be provided.

When conditions are such that neither a gangway nor straight ladder can be used, a Jacob's ladder meeting the requirements of §1918.23 may be used. 1918.22(a) (b) Each side of the gangway, and the turntable, if used, shall have a hand rail with a minimum height of 33 inches (.84 m) measured perpendicularly from rail to walking surfaces at the stanchion, with a midrail. Rails shall be of wood, pipe, chain, wire, rope or materials of equivalent strength and shall be kept taut always.

Portable stanchions supporting railings shall be supported or secured to prevent accidental dislodgement. 1918.22(b) (c) The gangway shall be kept properly trimmed.1918.22(c) (d) When a fixed flat tread accommodation ladder is used, and the angle is low enough to require employees to walk on the edge of the treads, cleated duckboards shall be laid over and secured to the ladder. 1918.22(d) (e) When the gangway overhangs the water so that there is danger of employees falling between the ship and the dock, a net or suitable protection shall be provided to prevent employees from receiving serious injury from falls to a lower level. 1918.22(e) (f) If the foot of a gangway is more than one foot (.30 m) away from the edge of the apron, the space between them shall be bridged by a firm walkway equipped with a hand rail with a minimum height of approximately 33 inches (.84 m) with midrails on both sides. 1918.22(f) (g) Gangways shall be kept clear of supporting bridles and other obstructions, to provide unobstructed passage. If, because of design, the gangway bridle cannot be moved to provide unobstructed passage, then the hazard shall be properly marked to alert employees of the danger. 1918.22(g) (h) Obstructions shall not be laid on or across the gangway.

§1918.24

§1918.21

§1918.25

Selected 1918 Longshoring Standards

(3) Except for combination ladders, self-supporting ladders shall not be used as single straight ladders.1918.24(j)(3) (4) Unless intended for cantilever operation, non-self-supporting ladders shall not be used to climb above the top support point.

1918.24(j)(4)

(5) Ladders shall not be used:1918.24(j)(5) (i) As guys, braces or skids; or1918.24(j)(5)(i) (ii) As platforms, runways or scaffolds.1918.24(j)(5)(ii) (6) Metal and wire-reinforced ladders (even with wooden side rails) shall not be used when employees on the ladder might contact energized electrical conductors.1918.24(j)(6) (7) Individual sections from different multi-sectional ladders or two or more single straight ladders shall not be tied or fastened together to achieve additional length.1918.24(j)(7) (8) Single rail ladders (i.e. made by fastening rungs or devices across a single rail) shall not be used.1918.24(j)(8)

§1918.25

Bridge plates and ramps (See also §1918.86)

(a) Bridge and car plates (dockboards). Bridge and car plates used afloat shall be well maintained and shall:1918.25(a) (1) Be strong enough to support the loads imposed on them;1918.25(a)(1) (2) Be secured or equipped with devices to prevent their dislodgement; 1918.25(a)(2)

(3) Be equipped with hand holds or other effective means to permit safe handling; and1918.25(a)(3) (4) Be designed, constructed, and maintained to prevent vehicles from running off the edge.31918.25(a)(4) 3

When the gap to be bridged is greater than 36 inches (.91m), an acceptalbe means of preventing vehicles from running off the edge is a minimum side board height of two and three-quarter inches.

(b) Portable ramps. Portable ramps used afloat shall be well maintained and shall:1918.25(b) (1) Be strong enough to support the loads imposed on them;1918.25(b)(1) (2) Be equipped with a railing meeting the requirements of §1918.21(b), if the slope is more than 20 degrees to the horizontal or if employees could fall more than four feet (1.22 m);1918.25(b)(2) (3) Be equipped with a slip resistant surface;1918.25(b)(3) (4) Be properly secured; and1918.25(b)(4) (5) Be designed, constructed, and maintained to prevent vehicles from running off the edge.41918.25(b)(5) 4 When the gap to be bridged is greater than 36 inches (.91m), an acceptable means of preventing vehicles from running off the edge is a minimum side board height of two and three-quarter inches.

§1918.26

Access to barges and river towboats

(a) With the exception of §1918.25(b)(2), ramps used solely for vehicle access to or between barges shall meet the requirements of §1918.25.1918.26(a) (b) When employees cannot step safely to or from the wharf and a float, barge, or river towboat, either a ramp meeting the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section or a safe walkway meeting the requirements of §1918.22(f) shall be provided. When a ramp or walkway cannot be used, a straight ladder meeting the requirements of §1918.24 and extending at least three feet (.91 m) above the upper landing surface and adequately secured or held against shifting or slipping shall be provided. When neither a walkway nor a straight ladder can be used, a Jacob's ladder meeting the requirements of §1918.23 shall be provided. Exception: For barges operating on the Mississippi River System, where the employer shows that these requirements cannot reasonably be met due to local conditions, other safe means of access shall be provided.1918.26(b) (c) When a barge or raft is being worked alongside a larger vessel, a Jacob's ladder meeting the requirements of §1918.23 shall be provided for each gang working alongside unless other safe means of access is provided. However, no more than two Jacob's ladders are required for any single barge or raft being worked.1918.26(c) (d) When longshoring operations are in progress on barges, the barges shall be securely made fast to the vessel, wharf, or dolphins.

1918.26(d)

§1918.31

Hatch coverings

(a) No cargo, dunnage, or other material shall be loaded or unloaded by means requiring the services of employees at any partially opened intermediate deck unless either the hatch at that deck is sufficiently covered or an adequate landing area suitable for the prevailing conditions exists. In no event shall such work be done unless the working area available for such employees extends for a distance of 10 feet (3.05 m) or more fore and aft and athwartships.1918.31(a) (b) Cargo shall not be landed on or handled over a covered hatch or 'tween-decks unless all hatch beams are in place under the hatch covers.1918.31(b)

48

(c) Missing, broken, or poorly fitting hatch covers that would not protect employees shall be reported at once to the officer in charge of the vessel. Pending replacement or repairs by the vessel, work shall not be performed in the section containing the unsafe covers or in adjacent sections unless the flooring is made safe.1918.31(c) (d) Hatch covers and hatch beams not of uniform size shall be placed only in the hatch, deck, and section in which they fit properly.1918.31(d) (e) Small trimming hatches in intermediate decks shall be securely covered or guarded while work is going on in the hatch in which they are found, unless they are actually in use.1918.31(e)

§1918.32

Stowed cargo and temporary landing surfaces

(a) Temporary surfaces on which loads are to be landed shall be of sufficient size and strength to permit employees to work safely.1918.32(a) (b) When the edge of a hatch section or of stowed cargo may constitute a fall hazard to an employee, the edge shall be guarded by a vertical safety net, or other means providing equal protection, to prevent an employee from falling. When the employer can demonstrate that vertical nets or other equally effective means of guarding cannot be used due to the type of cargo, cargo stowage, or other circumstances, a trapeze net shall be rigged at the top edge of the elevation or other means shall be taken to prevent injury if an employee falls. Safety nets shall be maintained in good condition and be of adequate strength for the purpose intended.1918.32(b) (c) When two gangs are working in the same hatch on different levels, a vertical safety net shall be rigged and securely fastened to prevent employees or cargo from falling. Safety nets shall be maintained in good condition and be of adequate strength for the purpose intended.

1918.32(c)

§1918.33

Deck loads

§1918.34

Other decks

§1918.35

Open hatches

§1918.35

Open hatches

§1918.36

Weather deck rails

§1918.37

Barges

(a) Employees shall not be permitted to pass over or around deck loads unless there is a safe route of passage.1918.33(a) (b) Employees giving signals to crane operators shall not be permitted to walk over deck loads from rail to coaming unless there is a safe route of passage. If it is necessary to stand or walk at the outboard or inboard edge of the deck load having less than 24 inches (.61 m) of bulwark, rail, coaming, or other protection, those employees shall be provided with protection against falling from the deck load.1918.33(b) (a) Cargo shall not be worked on decks that were not designed to support the load being worked.1918.34(a) (b) Grated decks shall be properly placed, supported, maintained and designed to support employees.1918.34(b) Open weather deck hatches around which employees must work that are not protected to a height of 24 inches (.61 m) by coamings shall be guarded by taut lines or barricades at a height of 36 to 42 inches (.91 to 1.07 m) above the deck, except on the side on which cargo is being worked. Any portable stanchions or uprights used shall be supported or secured to prevent accidental dislodgement.

Open weather deck hatches around which employees must work that are not protected to a height of 24 inches (.61 m) by coamings shall be guarded by taut lines or barricades at a height of 36 to 42 inches (.91 to 1.07 m) above the deck, except on the side on which cargo is being worked. Any portable stanchions or uprights used shall be supported or secured to prevent accidental dislodgement.

Removable weather deck rails shall be kept in place except when cargo operations require them to be removed, in which case they shall be replaced as soon as such cargo operations are completed. (a) Walking shall be prohibited along the sides of covered lighters or barges with coamings or cargo more than five feet (1.52 m) high unless a three-foot (.91 m) clear walkway or a grab rail or taut handline is provided.1918.37(a) (b) Walking or working shall be prohibited on the decks of barges to be loaded unless the walking or working surfaces have been determined by visual inspection to be structurally sound and maintained properly. If, while discharging a barge, an unsound deck surface is discovered, work shall be discontinued and shall not be resumed until means have been taken to ensure a safe work surface. 1918.37(b)

Cranes and derricks other than vessel's gear §1918.66

Cranes and derricks other than vessel's gear

1918.66(a)(12)(ii)

(13) Rope on drums. At least three full turns of rope shall remain on ungrooved drums, and two turns on grooved drums, under all operating conditions. Wire rope shall be secured to drums by clamps, U-bolts, shackles or equivalent means. Fiber rope fastenings are prohibited.1918.66(a)(13) (14) Brakes.1918.66(a)(14) (i) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane shall be equipped with at least one holding brake, applied directly to the motor shaft or gear train.1918.66(a)(14)(i) (ii) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane shall, in addition to the holding brake, be equipped with a controlled braking means to control lowering speeds.1918.66(a)(14)(ii)

(iii) Holding brakes for hoist units shall have not less than the following percentage of the rated load hoisting torque at the point where the brake is applied:1918.66(a)(14)(iii) [A] 125 percent when used with an other than mechanically controlled braking means;1918.66(a)(14)(iii)[A] [B] 100 percent when used with a mechanically controlled braking means; or1918.66(a)(14)(iii)[B] [C] 100 percent when two holding brakes are provided.

1918.66(a)(14)(iii)[C]

(iv) All power control braking means shall be capable of maintaining safe lowering speeds of rated loads.1918.66(a)(14)(iv) (15) Operating controls. Crane and derrick operating controls shall be clearly marked, or a chart showing their function shall be posted at the operator's position.1918.66(a)(15) (16) Booms. Cranes with elevatable booms and without operable automatic limiting devices shall be provided with boom stops if boom elevation can exceed maximum design angles from the horizontal.1918.66(a)(16) (17) Foot pedals. Foot pedals shall have a non-skid surface.

1918.66(a)(17)

(18) Access. Ladders, stairways, stanchions, grab irons, foot steps or equivalent means shall be provided as necessary to ensure safe access to footwalks, cab platforms, the cab and any portion of the superstructure that employees must reach.1918.66(a)(18) (b) Operations1918.66(b) (1) Use of cranes together. When two or more cranes hoist a load in unison, a designated person shall direct the operation and instruct personnel in positioning, rigging of the load and movements to be made.1918.66(b)(1) (2) Guarding of swing radius. Accessible areas within the swing radius of the body of a revolving crane shall be physically guarded during operations to prevent an employee from being caught between the body of the crane and any fixed structure or between parts of the crane.1918.66(b)(2) (3) Prohibited usage.1918.66(b)(3) (i) Equipment shall not be used in a way that exerts side loading stresses upon the crane or derrick boom.1918.66(b)(3)(i) (ii) No crane or derrick having a visible or known defect that may affect safe operation shall be used.1918.66(b)(3)(ii) (4) Unattended cranes. The following steps shall be taken before leaving a crane unattended between work periods:1918.66(b)(4) (i) Suspended loads, such as those hoisted by lifting magnets or clamshell buckets, shall be landed unless the storage position or maximum hoisting of the suspended device will provide equivalent safety;1918.66(b)(4)(i) (ii) Clutches shall be disengaged;1918.66(b)(4)(ii) (iii) The power supply shall be shut off;1918.66(b)(4)(iii) (iv) The crane shall be secured against accidental travel; and 1918.66(b)(4)(iv)

(v) The boom shall be lowered or secured 1918.66(b)(4)(v)

against

movement.

(c) Protection for employees being hoisted.1918.66(c) (1) No employee shall be hoisted by the load hoisting apparatus of a crane or derrick except on a platform meeting the following requirements:1918.66(c)(1) (i) Enclosed by a railing or other means providing protection equivalent to that described in §1917.112(c) of this chapter; 1918.66(c)(1)(i)

(ii) Fitted with toe boards if the platform has open railings; 1918.66(c)(1)(ii)

(iii) A safety factor of four based on ultimate strength;1918.66(c)(1)(iii) (iv) Bearing a plate or permanent marking indicating maximum load rating, which shall not be exceeded, and the weight of the platform itself;1918.66(c)(1)(iv) (v) Equipped with a device to prevent access doors, when used, from opening accidentally;1918.66(c)(1)(v) (vi) Equipped with overhead protection for employees on the platform if they are exposed to falling objects or overhead hazards; and1918.66(c)(1)(vi) (vii) Secured to the load line by means other than wedge and socket attachments, unless the free (bitter) end of the line is secured back to itself by a clamp placed as close above the wedge as possible.1918.66(c)(1)(vii) (2) Except in an emergency, the hoisting mechanism of all cranes or derricks used to hoist personnel shall operate only in power up and power down, with automatic brake application when not hoisting or lowering.1918.66(c)(2) (3) All cranes and derricks used to hoist personnel shall be equipped with an anti-two-blocking device.1918.66(c)(3) (4) Variable radius booms of a crane or derrick used to hoist personnel shall be so constructed or secured as to prevent accidental boom movement.1918.66(c)(4)

49

1918 Longshoring Standards

(a) General. The following requirements shall apply to the use of cranes and derricks brought aboard vessels for conducting longshoring operations. They shall not apply to cranes and derricks forming part of a vessel's permanent equipment. 1918.66(a) (1) Certification. Cranes and derricks shall be certificated in accordance with part 1919 of this chapter.1918.66(a)(1) (2) Posted weight. The crane weight shall be posted on all cranes hoisted aboard vessels for temporary use.1918.66(a)(2) (3) Rating chart. All cranes and derricks having ratings that vary with boom length, radius (outreach) or other variables shall have a durable rating chart visible to the operator, covering the complete range of the manufacturers' (or design) capacity ratings. The rating chart shall include all operating radii (outreach) for all permissible boom lengths and jib lengths, as applicable, with and without outriggers, and alternate ratings for optional equipment affecting such ratings. Precautions or warnings specified by the owner or manufacturer shall be included along with the chart.1918.66(a)(3) (4) Rated loads. The manufacturers' (or design) rated loads for the conditions of use shall not be exceeded.1918.66(a)(4) (5) Change of rated loads. Designated working loads shall not be increased beyond the manufacturers' ratings or original design limitations unless such increase receives the manufacturers' approval. When the manufacturers' services are not available or where the equipment is of foreign manufacture, engineering design analysis shall be done or approved by a person accredited for certificating the equipment under part 1919 of this chapter.

Engineering design analysis shall be done by a registered professional engineer competent in the field of cranes and derricks. Any structural changes required by the change in rating shall be carried out.1918.66(a)(5) (6) Radius indicator. When the rated load varies with the boom radius, the crane or derrick shall be fitted with a boom angle or radius indicator visible to the operator.1918.66(a)(6) (7) Operator's station. The cab, controls and mechanism of the equipment shall be so arranged that the operator has a clear view of the load or signalman, when one is used. Cab glass, when used, shall be safety plate glass or equivalent. Cranes with missing, broken, cracked, scratched, or dirty glass (or equivalent), that impairs operator vision shall not be used. Clothing, tools, and equipment shall be stored so as not to interfere with access, operation, and the operator's view.1918.66(a)(7) (8) Counterweights or ballast. Cranes shall be operated only with the specified type and amount of ballast or counterweights. Ballast or counterweights shall be located and secured only as provided in the manufacturers' or design specifications, which shall be available for inspection.1918.66(a)(8) (9) Outriggers. Outriggers shall be used according to the manufacturers' specifications or design data, which shall be available for inspection. Floats, when used, shall be securely attached to the outriggers. Wood blocks or other support shall be of sufficient size to support the outrigger, free of defects that may affect safety, and of sufficient width and length to prevent the crane from shifting or toppling under load.1918.66(a)(9) (10) Exhaust gases. Engine exhaust gases shall be discharged away from crane operating personnel.1918.66(a)(10) (11) Electrical/Guarding. Electrical equipment shall be so placed or enclosed that live parts will not be exposed to accidental contact.

Designated persons may work on energized equipment only if necessary during inspection, maintenance, or repair; otherwise the equipment shall be stopped and its power source locked out and tagged out.1918.66(a)(11) (12) Fire extinguisher.1918.66(a)(12) (i) At least one portable approved or listed fire extinguisher of at least a 5-B:C rating or equivalent shall be accessible in the cab of the crane or derrick.1918.66(a)(12)(i) (ii) No portable fire extinguisher using carbon tetrachloride or chlorobromomethane extinguishing agents shall be used.

§1918.66(c)

§1918.85

Selected 1918 Longshoring Standards

(5) Platforms or devices used to hoist employees shall be inspected for defects before each day's use and shall be removed from service if defective.1918.66(c)(5) (6) Employees being hoisted shall remain in continuous sight of and communication with the operator or signalman.1918.66(c)(6) (7) Operators shall remain at the controls when employees are hoisted.1918.66(c)(7) (8) Cranes shall not travel while employees are hoisted, except in emergencies or in normal tier-to-tier transfer of employees during container operations.1918.66(c)(8) (d) Routine inspection.1918.66(d) (1) Designated persons shall visually inspect each crane and derrick on each day of use for defects in functional operating components and shall report any defect found to the employer. The employer shall inform the operator of the result of the inspection.1918.66(d)(1) (2) A designated person shall thoroughly inspect all functional components and accessible structural features of each crane or device at monthly intervals.1918.66(d)(2) (3) Any defects found during such inspections that may create a safety hazard shall be corrected before further equipment use.

Repairs shall be done only by designated persons.1918.66(d)(3) (4) A record of each monthly inspection shall be maintained for six months in or on the crane or derrick or at the terminal.1918.66(d)(4) (e) Protective devices.1918.66(e) (1) When exposed moving parts such as gears, chains and chain sprockets present a hazard to employees during crane and derrick operations, those parts shall be securely guarded.1918.66(e)(1) (2) Crane hooks shall be latched or otherwise secured to prevent accidental load disengagement.1918.66(e)(2) (f) Load-indicating devices.1918.66(f) (1) Unless exempted by the provisions of paragraph (f)(1)(viii) of this section, every crane used to load or discharge cargo into or out of a vessel shall be fitted with a load-indicating device or alternative device in proper working condition that shall meet the following criteria:1918.66(f)(1) (i) The type or model of any load-indicating device used shall be such as to provide:1918.66(f)(1)(i) [A] A direct indication in the cab of actual weight hoisted or a means of determining this by reference to crane ratings posted and visible to the operator, except that the use of a dynamometer or simple scale alone will not meet this requirement; or1918.66(f)(1)(i)[A] [B] An automatic weight-moment device (e.g., a computer) providing indications in the cab according to the radius and load at the moment; or1918.66(f)(1)(i)[B] [C] A device that will prevent an overloaded condition.

1918.66(f)(1)(i)[C]

(ii) The accuracy of the load-indicating device, weight-moment device, or overload protection device shall be such that any indicated load (or limit), including the sum of actual weight hoisted and additional equipment or "add ons" such as slings, sensors, blocks, etc., is within the range between 95 percent (5 percent underload) and 110 percent (10 percent overload) of the actual true total load. Such accuracy shall be required over the range of daily operating variables reasonably anticipated under the conditions of use.1918.66(f)(1)(ii) (iii) The device shall enable the operator to decide before making any lift that the load indicating device or alternative device is operative. In the alternative, if the device is not so mounted or attached and does not include such means of checking, it shall be certified by the manufacturer to remain operative for a specific time. The device shall be checked for accuracy, using known values of the load, at the time of every certification survey (see §1918.11) and at such additional times as may be recommended by the manufacturer.1918.66(f)(1)(iii) (iv) When the load indicating device or alternative device is so arranged in the supporting system (crane structure) that its failure could cause the load to be dropped, its strength shall not be the limiting factor of the supporting system (crane structure).

1918.66(f)(1)(iv)

(v) Units of measure in pounds or both pounds and kilograms (or other indicators of measurement, such as colored indicator lights), capacity of the indicating system, accuracy of the indicating system, and operating instructions and precautions shall be conspicuously marked. If the system used provides no readout but automatically ceases crane operation when the rated load limit is reached under any specific condition of use, the marking shall provide the make and model of the device installed, a description of what it does, how it is operated, and any necessary precautions regarding the system. All of these markings shall be readily visible to the operator.1918.66(f)(1)(v)

50

(vi) All load indicating devices shall operate over the full operating radius. Overall accuracy shall be based on actual applied loads and not on full scale (full capacity) load.1918.66(f)(1)(vi) Note to paragraph (f)(1)(vi): If the accuracy of the load indicating device is based on full scale loads and the device is arbitrarily set at plus or minus 10 percent, it would accept a reading between 90,000 and 110,000 lbs. at full capacity for a machine with a maximum rating of 100,000 lbs. but would also show a reading of between zero and 20,000 lbs. at that outreach (radius) at which the load would be 10,000 lbs.; this is clearly unacceptable. If, however, the accuracy of the device is based on actual applied loads under the same conditions, the acceptable range would remain the same with the 100,000-lb. load but would show a figure between 9,000 and 11,000 lbs. at the 10,000-lb. load; this is an acceptable reading.

(vii) When a load-indicating device uses the radius as a factor in its use or in its operating indications, the indicated radius (which may be in feet and/or meters, or degrees of boom angle, depending on the system used) shall be within the range between 97 percent and 110 percent of the actual (true) radius.

When radius is presented in degrees, and feet or meters are required for necessary determinations, a conversion chart shall be provided.1918.66(f)(1)(vii) (viii) The load indicating device requirements of this paragraph do not apply to a crane:1918.66(f)(1)(viii) [A] Of the trolley equipped bridge type while handling containers known to be and identified as empty, or loaded, and in either case according to the provisions of §1918.85(b) of this part, or while hoisting other lifts by means of a lifting beam supplied by the crane manufacturer for the purpose and in all cases within the crane rating;1918.66(f)(1)(viii)[A] [B] While handling bulk commodities or cargoes by means of clamshell bucket or magnet;1918.66(f)(1)(viii)[B] [C] While used to handle or hold hoses in connection with transfer of bulk liquids, or other hose-handled products; or 1918.66(f)(1)(viii)[C]

[D] While the crane is used exclusively to handle cargo or equipment whose total actual gross weight is marked on the unit or units hoisted, and the total actual gross weight never exceeds 11,200 lbs., and the load is less than the rated capacity of the crane at the maximum outreach possible at the time.1918.66(f)(1)(viii)[D] (2) [Reserved]1918.66(f)(2)

§1918.85

Containerized cargo operations

(a) Container markings. Every intermodal container shall be legibly and permanently marked with: 1918.85(a) (1) The weight of the container when empty, in pounds;1918.85(a)(1) (2) The maximum cargo weight the container is designed to carry, in pounds; and1918.85(a)(2) (3) The sum of the weight of the container and the maximum cargo weight, in pounds.1918.85(a)(3) (b) Container weight. No container shall be hoisted by any lifting appliance unless the following conditions have been met: 1918.85(b)

(1) The employer shall determine from the carrier whether a container to be hoisted is loaded or empty. Before loading or discharging, empty containers shall be identified in a manner that will inform every supervisor and job boss on the site and in charge of loading or discharging, or every crane or other hoisting equipment operator and signalman, that such container is empty. Methods of identification may include cargo plans, manifests, or markings on the container.1918.85(b)(1) (2) For a loaded container:1918.85(b)(2) (i) The actual gross weight shall be plainly marked and visible to the crane or other hoisting equipment operator or signalman, or to every supervisor or job boss on site and in charge of the operation; or1918.85(b)(2)(i) (ii) The cargo stowage plan or equivalent permanently recorded display serving the same purpose, containing the actual gross weight and the serial number or other positive identification of that specific container, shall be provided to the crane or other hoisting equipment operator and signalman, and to every supervisor and job boss on site and in charge of the operation.

1918.85(b)(2)(ii)

(3) Every outbound container received at a marine terminal ready to load aboard a vessel without further consolidation or loading shall be weighed to obtain the actual gross weight, either at the terminal or elsewhere, before being hoisted.1918.85(b)(3) (4) (i) When container weighing scales are found at a marine terminal, any outbound container with a load consolidated at that terminal shall be weighed to obtain the actual weight before being hoisted.1918.85(b)(4)(i)

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

Selected 1926 Construction Standards §1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards

(a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lanyards shall be used only for employee safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, or lanyard actually subjected to in-service loading, as distinguished from static load testing, shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee safeguarding. 1926.104(a) (b) Lifelines shall be secured above the point of operation to an anchorage or structural member capable of supporting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 pounds. 1926.104(b) (c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling operations, or in areas where the lifeline may be subjected to cutting or abrasion, shall be a minimum of 7⁄8-inch wire core manila rope. For all other lifeline applications, a minimum of 3⁄4-inch manila or equivalent, with a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds, shall be used.

1926.104(c)

(d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a minimum of 1⁄2-inch nylon, or equivalent, with a maximum length to provide for a fall of no greater than 6 feet. The rope shall have a nominal breaking strength of 5,400 pounds. 1926.104(d) (e) All safety belt and lanyard hardware shall be drop forged or pressed steel, cadmium plated in accordance with type 1, Class B plating specified in Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Surface shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. 1926.104(e) (f) All safety belt and lanyard hardware, except rivets, shall be capable of withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 pounds without cracking, breaking, or taking a permanent deformation.

1926.104(f)

§1926.105 Safety nets

(a)  Safety nets shall be provided when workplaces are more than 25 feet above the ground or water surface, or other surfaces where the use of ladders, scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary floors, safety lines, or safety belts is impractical. 1926.105(a) (b) Where safety net protection is required by this part, operations shall not be undertaken until the net is in place and has been tested. 1926.105(b) (c) (1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond the edge of the work surface where employees are exposed and shall be installed as close under the work surface as practical but in no case more than 25 feet below such work surface. Nets shall be hung with sufficient clearance to prevent user's contact with the surfaces or structures below. Such clearances shall be determined by impact load testing.1926.105(c)(1) (2) It is intended that only one level of nets be required for bridge construction.1926.105(c)(2) (d) The mesh size of nets shall not exceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets shall meet accepted performance standards of 17,500 foot-pounds minimum impact resistance as determined and certified by the manufacturers, and shall bear a label of proof test.

Edge ropes shall provide a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. 1926.105(d) (e) Forged steel safety hooks or shackles shall be used to fasten the net to its supports. 1926.105(e) (f) Connections between net panels shall develop the full strength of the net. 1926.105(f)

§1926.106 Working over or near water

(a)  Employees working over or near water, where the danger of drowning exists, shall be provided with U.S. Coast Guardapproved life jacket or buoyant work vests. 1926.106(a) (b) Prior to and after each use, the buoyant work vests or life preservers shall be inspected for defects which would alter their strength or buoyancy. Defective units shall not be used.

1926.106(b)

§1926.107 Definitions applicable to this subpart

(a) Contaminant means any material which by reason of its action upon, within, or to a person is likely to cause physical harm. (b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable for supporting one person. One end is fastened to a safety belt or harness and the other end is secured to a substantial object or a safety line.

(c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for supporting one person, to which a lanyard or safety belt (or harness) is attached. (d) O.D. means optical density and refers to the light refractive characteristics of a lens. (e) Radiant energy means energy that travels outward in all directions from its sources. (f) Safety belt means a device, usually worn around the waist which, by reason of its attachment to a lanyard and lifeline or a structure, will prevent a worker from falling.

§1926.150 Fire protection

(a) General requirements.1926.150(a) (1) The employer shall be responsible for the development of a fire protection program to be followed throughout all phases of the construction and demolition work, and he shall provide for the firefighting equipment as specified in this subpart. As fire hazards occur, there shall be no delay in providing the necessary equipment.1926.150(a)(1) (2) Access to all available firefighting equipment shall be maintained at all times.1926.150(a)(2) (3) All firefighting equipment, provided by the employer, shall be conspicuously located.1926.150(a)(3) (4) All firefighting equipment shall be periodically inspected and maintained in operating condition. Defective equipment shall be immediately replaced.1926.150(a)(4) (5) As warranted by the project, the employer shall provide a trained and equipped firefighting organization (Fire Brigade) to assure adequate protection to life.1926.150(a)(5) (b) Water supply.1926.150(b) (1) A temporary or permanent water supply, of sufficient volume, duration, and pressure, required to properly operate the firefighting equipment shall be made available as soon as combustible materials accumulate.1926.150(b)(1) (2) Where underground water mains are to be provided, they shall be installed, completed, and made available for use as soon as practicable.1926.150(b)(2) (c)  Portable firefighting equipment1926.150(c) (1) Fire extinguishers and small hose lines.1926.150(c)(1) (i) A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000 square feet of the protected building area, or major fraction thereof. Travel distance from any point of the protected area to the nearest fire extinguisher shall not exceed 100 feet.

1926.150(c)(1)(i)

(ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water with two fire pails may be substituted for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rating.

1926.150(c)(1)(ii)

(iii) A 1⁄2-inch diameter garden-type hose line, not to exceed 100 feet in length and equipped with a nozzle, may be substituted for a 2A- rated fire extinguisher, providing it is capable of discharging a minimum of 5 gallons per minute with a minimum hose stream range of 30 feet horizontally. The garden-type hose lines shall be mounted on conventional racks or reels. The number and location of hose racks or reels shall be such that at least one hose stream can be applied to all points in the area.

1926.150(c)(1)(iii)

(iv) One or more fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A, shall be provided on each floor. In multistory buildings, at least one fire extinguisher shall be located adjacent to stairway.

1926.150(c)(1)(iv)

(v) Extinguishers and water drums, subject to freezing, shall be protected from freezing.1926.150(c)(1)(v) (vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 10B, shall be provided within 50 feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids or 5 pounds of flammable gas are being used on the jobsite. This requirement does not apply to the integral fuel tanks of motor vehicles.1926.150(c)(1)(vi) (vii)Carbon tetrachloride and other toxic vaporizing liquid fire extinguishers are prohibited.1926.150(c)(1)(vii) (viii)Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected periodically and maintained in accordance with Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, NFPA No. 10A-1970.1926.150(c)(1)(viii) (ix)  Fire extinguishers which have been listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, shall be used to meet the requirements of this subpart.1926.150(c)(1)(ix) (x)  Table F-1 may be used as a guide for selecting the appropriate portable fire extinguishers.1926.150(c)(1)(x)

1926 Construction Standards

(c)  Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line shall be provided and readily available for emergency rescue operations. Distance between ring buoys shall not exceed 200 feet. 1926.106(c) (d)  At least one lifesaving skiff shall be immediately available at locations where employees are working over or adjacent to water. 1926.106(d)

§1926.104

§1926.151

Selected 1926 Construction Standards Table F-1 Fire Extinguishers Data

(2) Fire hose and connections.1926.150(c)(2) (i) One hundred feet, or less, of 11⁄2-inch hose, with a nozzle capable of discharging water at 25 gallons or more per minute, may be substituted for a fire extinguisher rated not more than 2A in the designated area provided that the hose line can reach all points in the area.1926.150(c)(2)(i) (ii) If fire hose connections are not compatible with local firefighting equipment, the contractor shall provide adapters, or equivalent, to permit connections.1926.150(c)(2)(ii) (iii) During demolition involving combustible materials, charged hose lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall be made available.1926.150(c)(2)(iii) (d) Fixed firefighting equipment1926.150(d) (1) Sprinkler protection.1926.150(d)(1) (i) If the facility being constructed includes the installation of automatic sprinkler protection, the installation shall closely follow the construction and be placed in service as soon as applicable laws permit following completion of each story.1926.150(d)(1)(i) (ii) During demolition or alterations, existing automatic sprinkler installations shall be retained in service as long as reasonable.

The operation of sprinkler control valves shall be permitted only by properly authorized persons. Modification of sprinkler systems to permit alterations or additional demolition should be expedited so that the automatic protection may be returned to service as quickly as possible. Sprinkler control valves shall be checked daily at close of work to ascertain that the protection is in service.1926.150(d)(1)(ii) (2) Standpipes. In all structures in which standpipes are required, or where standpipes exist in structures being altered, they shall be brought up as soon as applicable laws permit, and shall be maintained as construction progresses in such a manner that they are always ready for fire protection use. The standpipes shall be provided with Siamese fire department connections on the outside of the structure, at the street level, which shall be conspicuously marked. There shall be at least one standard hose outlet at each floor.1926.150(d)(2) (e) Fire alarm devices.1926.150(e) (1) An alarm system, e.g., telephone system, siren, etc., shall be established by the employer whereby employees on the site and the local fire department can be alerted for an emergency.

1926.150(e)(1)

(2) The alarm code and reporting instructions shall be conspicuously posted at phones and at employee entrances.1926.150(e)(2)

54

(f) Fire cutoffs.1926.150(f) (1) Fire walls and exit stairways, required for the completed buildings, shall be given construction priority. Fire doors, with automatic closing devices, shall be hung on openings as soon as practicable.

1926.150(f)(1)

(2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in buildings undergoing alterations or demolition until operations necessitate their removal.1926.150(f)(2)

§1926.151 Fire prevention

(a) Ignition hazards.1926.151(a) (1) Electrical wiring and equipment for light, heat, or power purposes shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of subpart K of this part.1926.151(a)(1) (2) Internal combustion engine powered equipment shall be so located that the exhausts are well away from combustible materials. When the exhausts are piped to outside the building under construction, a clearance of at least 6 inches shall be maintained between such piping and combustible material.1926.151(a)(2) (3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or in the vicinity of operations which constitute a fire hazard, and shall be conspicuously posted: "No Smoking or Open Flame."1926.151(a)(3) (4) Portable battery powered lighting equipment, used in connection with the storage, handling, or use of flammable gases or liquids, shall be of the type approved for the hazardous locations.

1926.151(a)(4)

(5)  The nozzle of air, inert gas, and steam lines or hoses, when used in the cleaning or ventilation of tanks and vessels that contain hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, shall be bonded to the tank or vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not be attached or detached in hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors.1926.151(a)(5) (b) Temporary buildings.1926.151(b) (1) No temporary building shall be erected where it will adversely affect any means of exit.1926.151(b)(1) (2) Temporary buildings, when located within another building or structure, shall be of either noncombustible construction or of combustible construction having a fire resistance of not less than 1 hour.1926.151(b)(2) (3) Temporary buildings, located other than inside another building and not used for the storage, handling, or use of flammable or combustible liquids, flammable gases, explosives, or blasting agents, or similar hazardous occupancies, shall be located at a distance of not less than 10 feet from another building or structure.

Flammable liquids Groups of temporary buildings, not exceeding 2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for the purposes of this part, be considered a single temporary building.1926.151(b)(3) (c) Open yard storage.1926.151(c) (1) Combustible materials shall be piled with due regard to the stability of piles and in no case higher than 20 feet.1926.151(c)(1) (2) Driveways between and around combustible storage piles shall be at least 15 feet wide and maintained free from accumulation of rubbish, equipment, or other articles or materials. Driveways shall be so spaced that a maximum grid system unit of 50 feet by 150 feet is produced.1926.151(c)(2) (3) The entire storage site shall be kept free from accumulation of unnecessary combustible materials. Weeds and grass shall be kept down and a regular procedure provided for the periodic cleanup of the entire area.1926.151(c)(3) (4) When there is a danger of an underground fire, that land shall not be used for combustible or flammable storage.1926.151(c)(4) (5) Method of piling shall be solid wherever possible and in orderly and regular piles. No combustible material shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet of a building or structure.1926.151(c)(5) (6) Portable fire extinguishing equipment, suitable for the fire hazard involved, shall be provided at convenient, conspicuously accessible locations in the yard area. Portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A, shall be placed so that maximum travel distance to the nearest unit shall not exceed 100 feet.1926.151(c)(6) (d) Indoor storage.1926.151(d) (1) Storage shall not obstruct, or adversely affect, means of exit.

1926.151(d)(1)

(2) All materials shall be stored, handled, and piled with due regard to their fire characteristics.1926.151(d)(2) (3) Noncompatible materials, which may create a fire hazard, shall be segregated by a barrier having a fire resistance of at least 1 hour.

1926.151(d)(3)

(4) Material shall be piled to minimize the spread of fire internally and to permit convenient access for firefighting. Stable piling shall be maintained at all times. Aisle space shall be maintained to safely accommodate the widest vehicle that may be used within the building for firefighting purposes.1926.151(d)(4) (5) Clearance of at least 36 inches shall be maintained between the top level of the stored material and the sprinkler deflectors.

1926.151(d)(5)

(6) Clearance shall be maintained around lights and heating units to prevent ignition of combustible materials.1926.151(d)(6) (7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be maintained around the path of travel of fire doors unless a barricade is provided, in which case no clearance is needed. Material shall not be stored within 36 inches of a fire door opening.1926.151(d)(7)

§1926.152 Flammable liquids

(a)  General requirements.1926.152(a) (1)  Only approved containers and portable tanks shall be used for storage and handling of flammable liquids. Approved safety cans or Department of Transportation approved containers shall be used for the handling and use of flammable liquids in quantities of 5 gallons or less, except that this shall not apply to those flammable liquid materials which are highly viscid (extremely hard to pour), which may be used and handled in original shipping containers. For quantities of one gallon or less, the original container may be used, for storage, use and handling of flammable liquids.

1926.152(a)(1)

(2) Flammable liquids shall not be stored in areas used for exits, stairways, or normally used for the safe passage of people.

1926.152(a)(2)

(ii) Approved metal storage cabinets will be acceptable.

1926.152(b)(2)(ii)

(iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous lettering, "FlammableKeep Away from Open Flames."1926.152(b)(2)(iii) (3) Not more than 60 gallons of Category 1, 2 and/or 3 flammable liquids or 120 gallons of Category 4 flammable liquids shall be stored in any one storage cabinet. Not more than three such cabinets may be located in a single storage area. Quantities in excess of this shall be stored in an inside storage room.1926.152(b)(3) (4) (i) Inside storage rooms shall be constructed to meet the required fire-resistive rating for their use. Such construction shall comply with the test specifications set forth in Standard Methods of Fire Test of Building Construction and Material, NFPA 251-1969.

1926.152(b)(4)(i)

(ii) Where an automatic extinguishing system is provided, the system shall be designed and installed in an approved manner.

Openings to other rooms or buildings shall be provided with noncombustible liquid-tight raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in height, or the floor in the storage area shall be at least 4 inches below the surrounding floor. Openings shall be provided with approved self-closing fire doors. The room shall be liquid-tight where the walls join the floor. A permissible alternate to the sill or ramp is an open-grated trench, inside of the room, which drains to a safe location. Where other portions of the building or other buildings are exposed, windows shall be protected as set forth in the Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA No. 80-1970, for Class E or F openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nominal thickness may be used for shelving, racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor overlay, and similar installations.

1926.152(b)(4)(ii)

(iii) Materials which will react with water and create a fire hazard shall not be stored in the same room with flammable liquids.

1926.152(b)(4)(iii)

(iv) Storage in inside storage rooms shall comply with Table F-2 following:1926.152(b)(4)(iv) Table F-2 Fire protection provided

Fire resistance

Maximum size

Total allowable quantities gals./sq. ft./floor area

Yes

2 hrs

500 sq. ft

10

No

2 hrs

500 sq. ft

4

Yes

1 hr

150 sq. ft

5

No

1 hr

150 sq. ft

2

Note: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide or other system approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for this purpose.

(v) Electrical wiring and equipment located in inside storage rooms shall be approved for Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations.

For definition of Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations, see §1926.449.1926.152(b)(4)(v) (vi) Every inside storage room shall be provided with either a gravity or a mechanical exhausting system. Such system shall commence not more than 12 inches above the floor and be designed to provide for a complete change of air within the room at least 6 times per hour. If a mechanical exhausting system is used, it shall be controlled by a switch located outside of the door. The ventilating equipment and any lighting fixtures shall be operated by the same switch. An electric pilot light shall be installed adjacent to the switch if Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are dispensed within the room. Where gravity ventilation is provided, the fresh air intake, as well as the exhausting outlet from the room, shall be on the exterior of the building in which the room is located.1926.152(b)(4)(vi) (vii)In every inside storage room there shall be maintained one clear aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers over 30 gallons capacity shall not be stacked one upon the other.

1926.152(b)(4)(vii)

(viii)Flammable liquids in excess of that permitted in inside storage rooms shall be stored outside of buildings in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.1926.152(b)(4)(viii) (5) Quantity. The quantity of flammable liquids kept in the vicinity of spraying operations shall be the minimum required for operations and should ordinarily not exceed a supply for 1 day or one shift.

Bulk storage of portable containers of flammable liquids shall be in a separate, constructed building detached from other important buildings or cut off in a standard manner.1926.152(b)(5) (c) Storage outside buildings.1926.152(c) (1) Storage of containers (not more than 60 gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gallons in any one pile or area. Piles or groups of containers shall be separated by a 5-foot clearance. Piles or groups of containers shall not be nearer than 20 feet to a building.

1926.152(c)(1)

55

1926 Construction Standards

(b) Indoor storage of flammable liquids.1926.152(b) (1) No more than 25 gallons of flammable liquids shall be stored in a room outside of an approved storage cabinet. For storage of liquefied petroleum gas, see §1926.153.1926.152(b)(1) (2) Quantities of flammable liquid in excess of 25 gallons shall be stored in an acceptable or approved cabinet meeting the following requirements:1926.152(b)(2) (i) Acceptable wooden storage cabinets shall be constructed in the following manner, or equivalent: The bottom, sides, and top shall be constructed of an exterior grade of plywood at least 1 inch in thickness, which shall not break down or delaminate under standard fire test conditions. All joints shall be rabbeted and shall be fastened in two directions with flathead wood screws. When more than one door is used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges shall be mounted in such a manner as to not lose their holding capacity due to loosening or burning out of the screws when subjected to fire. Such cabinets shall be painted inside and out with fire retardant paint.1926.152(b)(2)(i)

§1926.152(c)

§1926.152

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

(2) Within 200 feet of each pile of containers, there shall be a 12- footwide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus.

1926.152(c)(2)

(3)  The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert possible spills away from buildings or other exposures, or shall be surrounded by a curb or earth dike at least 12 inches high. When curbs or dikes are used, provisions shall be made for draining off accumulations of ground or rain water, or spills of flammable liquids. Drains shall terminate at a safe location and shall be accessible to operation under fire conditions.1926.152(c)(3) (4) Outdoor portable tank storage:1926.152(c)(4) (i) Portable tanks shall not be nearer than 20 feet from any building. Two or more portable tanks, grouped together, having a combined capacity in excess of 2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5- foot-clear area. Individual portable tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be separated by a 5-foot-clear area.

1926.152(c)(4)(i)

(ii) Within 200 feet of each portable tank, there shall be a 12- footwide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus.

1926.152(c)(4)(ii)

(5) Storage areas shall be kept free of weeds, debris, and other combustible material not necessary to the storage.1926.152(c)(5) (6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 gallons, shall be provided with emergency venting and other devices, as required by chapters III and IV of NFPA 30-1969, The Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.1926.152(c)(6) (7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 gallons, shall have emergency venting and other devices, as required by chapters II and III of The Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30-1969.

1926.152(c)(7)

(d) Fire control for flammable liquid storage.1926.152(d) (1) At least one portable fire extinguisher, having a rating of not less than 20-B units, shall be located outside of, but not more than 10 feet from, the door opening into any room used for storage of more than 60 gallons of flammable liquids.1926.152(d)(1) (2) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B units shall be located not less than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet, from any flammable liquid storage area located outside.1926.152(d)(2) (3) When sprinklers are provided, they shall be installed in accordance with the Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13-1969.1926.152(d)(3) (4) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B:C units shall be provided on all tank trucks or other vehicles used for transporting and/or dispensing flammable liquids.

1926.152(d)(4)

(e)  Dispensing liquids.1926.152(e) (1) Areas in which flammable liquids are transferred at one time, in quantities greater than 5 gallons from one tank or container to another tank or container, shall be separated from other operations by 25-feet distance or by construction having a fire resistance of at least 1 hour. Drainage or other means shall be provided to control spills. Adequate natural or mechanical ventilation shall be provided to maintain the concentration of flammable vapor at or below 10 percent of the lower flammable limit.1926.152(e)(1) (2)  Transfer of Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids from one container to another shall be done only when containers are electrically interconnected (bonded).1926.152(e)(2) (3) Flammable liquids shall be drawn from or transferred into vessels, containers, or tanks within a building or outside only through a closed piping system, from safety cans, by means of a device drawing through the top, or from a container, or portable tanks, by gravity or pump, through an approved self-closing valve. Transferring by means of air pressure on the container or portable tanks is prohibited.1926.152(e)(3) (4)  The dispensing units shall be protected against collision damage.1926.152(e)(4) (5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids shall be of an approved type.1926.152(e)(5) (f)  Handling liquids at point of final use.1926.152(f) (1) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids shall be kept in closed containers when not actually in use.1926.152(f)(1) (2) Leakage or spillage of flammable liquids shall be disposed of promptly and safely.1926.152(f)(2) (3) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids may be used only where there are no open flames or other sources of ignition within 50 feet of the operation, unless conditions warrant greater clearance.

1926.152(f)(3)

(g)  Service and refueling areas.1926.152(g) (1) Flammable liquids shall be stored in approved closed containers, in tanks located underground, or in aboveground portable tanks.

1926.152(g)(1)

56

(2)  The tank trucks shall comply with the requirements covered in the Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 385-1966.1926.152(g)(2) (3) The dispensing hose shall be an approved type.1926.152(g)(3) (4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an approved automatic-closing type without a latch-open device.1926.152(g)(4) (5) Underground tanks shall not be abandoned.1926.152(g)(5) (6) Clearly identified and easily accessible switch(es) shall be provided at a location remote from dispensing devices to shut off the power to all dispensing devices in the event of an emergency.

1926.152(g)(6)

(7) (i) Heating equipment of an approved type may be installed in the lubrication or service area where there is no dispensing or transferring of Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, provided the bottom of the heating unit is at least 18 inches above the floor and is protected from physical damage.1926.152(g)(7)(i) (ii) Heating equipment installed in lubrication or service areas, where Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are dispensed, shall be of an approved type for garages, and shall be installed at least 8 feet above the floor.1926.152(g)(7)(ii) (8) There shall be no smoking or open flames in the areas used for fueling, servicing fuel systems for internal combustion engines, receiving or dispensing of flammable liquids.1926.152(g)(8) (9) Conspicuous and legible signs prohibiting smoking shall be posted.1926.152(g)(9) (10) The motors of all equipment being fueled shall be shut off during the fueling operation.1926.152(g)(10) (11) Each service or fueling area shall be provided with at least one fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B:C located so that an extinguisher will be within 75 feet of each pump, dispenser, underground fill pipe opening, and lubrication or service area.

1926.152(g)(11)

(h) Scope. This section applies to the handling, storage, and use of flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C).

This section does not apply to: 1926.152(h) (1) Bulk transportation of flammable liquids; and1926.152(h)(1) (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel oil tanks and containers connected with oil burning equipment.1926.152(h)(2) (i) Tank storage1926.152(i) (1) Design and construction of tanks.1926.152(i)(1) (i) Materials.1926.152(i)(1)(i) [A] Tanks shall be built of steel except as provided in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B) through (E) of this section.1926.152(i)(1)(i)[A] [B] Tanks may be built of materials other than steel for installation underground or if required by the properties of the liquid stored. Tanks located above ground or inside buildings shall be of noncombustible construction.1926.152(i)(1)(i)[B] [C] Tanks built of materials other than steel shall be designed to specifications embodying principles recognized as good engineering design for the material used.1926.152(i)(1)(i)[C] [D] Unlined concrete tanks may be used for storing flammable liquids having a gravity of 40° API or heavier. Concrete tanks with special lining may be used for other services provided the design is in accordance with sound engineering practice.

1926.152(i)(1)(i)[D]

[E] [Reserved]1926.152(i)(1)(i)[E] [F] Special engineering consideration shall be required if the specific gravity of the liquid to be stored exceeds that of water or if the tanks are designed to contain flammable liquids at a liquid temperature below 0 °F.1926.152(i)(1)(i)[F] (ii) Fabrication.1926.152(i)(1)(ii) [A] [Reserved]1926.152(i)(1)(ii)[A] [B] Metal tanks shall be welded, riveted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or constructed by use of a combination of these methods. Filler metal used in brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an alloy having a melting point above 1000 °F. and below that of the metal joined.1926.152(i)(1)(ii)[B] (iii) Atmospheric tanks.1926.152(i)(1)(iii) [A] Atmospheric tanks shall be built in accordance with acceptable good standards of design. Atmospheric tanks may be built in accordance with:1926.152(i)(1)(iii)[A] [1] Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58, Standard for Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.1926.152(i)(1)(iii)[A][1] [2] American Petroleum Institute Standards No. 12A, Specification for Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells,

Flammable liquids Seventh Edition, September 1951, or No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, Third Edition, 1966.

1926.152(i)(1)(iii)[A][2]

[3] American Petroleum Institute Standards No. 12B, Specification for Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1, March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for Large Welded Production Tanks, Seventh Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, Specification for Small Welded Production Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. Tanks built in accordance with these standards shall be used only as production tanks for storage of crude petroleum in oil-producing areas.

1926.152(i)(1)(iii)[A][3]

[B] Tanks designed for underground service not exceeding 2,500 gallons (9,462.5 L) capacity may be used aboveground.1926.152(i)(1)(iii)[B] [C] Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels may be used as atmospheric tanks.1926.152(i)(1)(iii)[C] [D] Atmospheric tanks shall not be used for the storage of a flammable liquid at a temperature at or above its boiling point.1926.152(i)(1)(iii)[D] (iv) Low pressure tanks.1926.152(i)(1)(iv) [A] The normal operating pressure of the tank shall not exceed the design pressure of the tank.1926.152(i)(1)(iv)[A] [B] Low-pressure tanks shall be built in accordance with acceptable standards of design. Low-pressure tanks may be built in accordance with:1926.152(i)(1)(iv)[B] [1] American Petroleum Institute Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules for the Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.1926.152(i)(1)(iv)[B][1] [2] The principles of the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, 1968.1926.152(i)(1)(iv)[B][2] [C] Atmospheric tanks built according to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) of this section and shall be limited to 2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting conditions.1926.152(i)(1)(iv)[C] This paragraph may be used for operating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g.

[D] Pressure vessels may be used as low-pressure tanks.

1926.152(i)(1)(iv)[D]

(v) Pressure vessels.1926.152(i)(1)(v) [A] The normal operating pressure of the vessel shall not exceed the design pressure of the vessel.1926.152(i)(1)(v)[A] [B] Pressure vessels shall be built in accordance with the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 1968.1926.152(i)(1)(v)[B] (vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. When tanks are not designed in accordance with the American Petroleum Institute, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, or the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.'s, standards, or if corrosion is anticipated beyond that provided for in the design formulas used, additional metal thickness or suitable protective coatings or linings shall be provided to compensate for the corrosion loss expected during the design life of the tank.1926.152(i)(1)(vi) (2) Installation of outside aboveground tanks.1926.152(i)(2) (i) [Reserved]1926.152(i)(2)(i) (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between aboveground tanks.

1926.152(i)(2)(ii)

[A] The distance between any two flammable liquid storage tanks shall not be less than 3 feet (0.912 m).1926.152(i)(2)(ii)[A] [B] Except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance between any two adjacent tanks shall not be less than one- sixth the sum of their diameters. When the diameter of one tank is less than one-half the diameter of the adjacent tank, the distance between the two tanks shall not be less than one-half the diameter of the smaller tank.

1926.152(i)(2)(ii)[B]

1926.152(i)(2)(ii)[C]

[D] Where unstable flammable liquids are stored, the distance between such tanks shall not be less than one-half the sum of their diameters.1926.152(i)(2)(ii)[D] [E] When tanks are compacted in three or more rows or in an irregular pattern, greater spacing or other means shall be provided so that inside tanks are accessible for firefighting purposes.1926.152(i)(2)(ii)[E] [F] The minimum separation between a liquefied petroleum gas container and a flammable liquid storage tank shall be 20

feet (6.08 m), except in the case of flammable liquid tanks operating at pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or equipped with emergency venting which will permit pressures to exceed 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of this section shall apply. Suitable means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of flammable liquids under adjacent liquefied petroleum gas containers such as by diversion curbs or grading. When flammable liquid storage tanks are within a diked area, the liquefied petroleum gas containers shall be outside the diked area and at least 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the centerline of the wall of the diked area. The foregoing provisions shall not apply when liquefied petroleum gas containers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or less capacity are installed adjacent to fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons (2,081.75 L) or less capacity.1926.152(i)(2)(ii)[F] (iii) [Reserved]1926.152(i)(2)(iii) (iv) Normal venting for aboveground tanks.1926.152(i)(2)(iv) [A] Atmospheric storage tanks shall be adequately vented to prevent the development of vacuum or pressure sufficient to distort the roof of a cone roof tank or exceeding the design pressure in the case of other atmospheric tanks, as a result of filling or emptying, and atmospheric temperature changes.

1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[A]

[B] Normal vents shall be sized either in accordance with: 1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[B]

[1] The American Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 (1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Storage Tanks; or1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[B][1] [2] other accepted standard; or1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[B][2] [3] shall be at least as large as the filling or withdrawal connection, whichever is larger but in no case less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside diameter.

1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[B][3]

[C] Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels shall be adequately vented to prevent development of pressure or vacuum, as a result of filling or emptying and atmospheric temperature changes, from exceeding the design pressure of the tank or vessel. Protection shall also be provided to prevent overpressure from any pump discharging into the tank or vessel when the pump discharge pressure can exceed the design pressure of the tank or vessel.1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[C] [D] If any tank or pressure vessel has more than one fill or withdrawal connection and simultaneous filling or withdrawal can be made, the vent size shall be based on the maximum anticipated simultaneous flow.1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[D] [E] Unless the vent is designed to limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or less, the outlet of vents and vent drains shall be arranged to discharge in such a manner as to prevent localized overheating of any part of the tank in the event vapors from such vents are ignited.1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[E] [F] Tanks and pressure vessels storing Category 1 flammable liquids shall be equipped with venting devices that shall be normally closed except when venting to pressure or vacuum conditions. Tanks and pressure vessels storing Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be equipped with venting devices that shall be normally closed except when venting under pressure or vacuum conditions, or with approved flame arresters.1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[F] Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls (barrels) (84 m(3)) capacity or less containing crude petroleum in crude-producing areas; and, outside aboveground atmospheric tanks under 1,000 gallons (3,785 L) capacity containing other than Category 1 flammable liquids may have open vents. (See paragraph (i)(2)(vi)(B) of this section.)

[G] Flame arresters or venting devices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F) of this section may be omitted for Category 2 flammable liquids or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) where conditions are such that their use may, in case of obstruction, result in tank damage.1926.152(i)(2)(iv)[G] (v) Emergency relief venting for fire exposure for aboveground tanks.1926.152(i)(2)(v) [A] Every aboveground storage tank shall have some form of construction or device that will relieve excessive internal pressure caused by exposure fires.1926.152(i)(2)(v)[A] [B] In a vertical tank the construction referred to in paragraph (i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a weak roof-to-shell seam, or other approved pressure relieving construction. The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be constructed to fail preferential to any other seam.

1926.152(i)(2)(v)[B]

[C] Where entire dependence for emergency relief is placed upon pressure relieving devices, the total venting capacity of

57

1926 Construction Standards

[C] Where crude petroleum in conjunction with production facilities are located in noncongested areas and have capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons (3,000 barrels), the distance between such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet (0.912 m).

§1926.152(i)

§1926.152

Selected 1926 Construction Standards both normal and emergency vents shall be enough to prevent rupture of the shell or bottom of the tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads if horizontal. If unstable liquids are stored, the effects of heat or gas resulting from polymerization, decomposition, condensation, or self-reactivity shall be taken into account. The total capacity of both normal and emergency venting devices shall be not less than that derived from Table F-10 except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or (F) of this section. Such device may be a self-closing manhole cover, or one using long bolts that permit the cover to lift under internal pressure, or an additional or larger relief valve or valves. The wetted area of the tank shall be calculated on the basis of 55 percent of the total exposed area of a sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the total exposed area of a horizontal tank and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above grade of the exposed shell area of a vertical tank.1926.152(i)(2)(v)[C]

1926.152(i)(2)(v)[H]

140 (12.88)

147,000 (4,116)

1,600 (147.2)

614,000 (17,192)

160 (14.72)

168,000 (4,704)

1,800 (165.6)

639,000 (17,892)

180 (16.56)

190,000 (5,320)

2,000 (180.4)

662,000 (18,536)

200 (18.4)

211,000 (5,908)

2,400 (220.8)

704,000 (19,712)

[I] The flow capacity of tank venting devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller in nominal pipe size shall be determined by actual test of each type and size of vent. These flow tests may be conducted by the manufacturer if certified by a qualified impartial observer, or may be conducted by an outside agency. The flow capacity of tank venting devices larger than 12 inches (30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including manhole covers with long bolts or equivalent, may be calculated provided that the opening pressure is actually measured, the rating pressure and corresponding free orifice area are stated, the word "calculated" appears on the nameplate, and the computation is based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 applied to the rated orifice area.1926.152(i)(2)(v)[I] (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks.1926.152(i)(2)(vi) [A] Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.1926.152(i)(2)(vi)[A] [B] Where vent pipe outlets for tanks storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are adjacent to buildings or public ways, they shall be located so that the vapors are released at a safe point outside of buildings and not less than 12 feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent ground level. In order to aid their dispersion, vapors shall be discharged upward or horizontally away from closely adjacent walls.

Vent outlets shall be located so that flammable vapors will not be trapped by eaves or other obstructions and shall be at least 5 feet (1.52 m) from building openings.1926.152(i)(2)(vi)[B] [C] When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are subject to the same fire exposure.

250 (23)

239,000 (6,692)

2,800 (257.6) and over

742,000 (20,776)

(vii)Drainage,

300 (27.6)

265,000 (7,420)

Table F-10 — Wetted Area Versus Cubic Feet (Meters) Free Air Per Hour [14.7 psia and 60 °F. (15.55 °C)] Square feet (m2)

CFH (m3H)

Square feet (m2)

CFH (m3H)

20 (1.84)

21,100 (590.8)

350 (32.2)

288,000 (8,064)

30 (2.76)

31,600 (884.8)

400 (36.8)

312,000 (8,736)

40 (3.68)

42,100 (1,178.8)

500 (46)

354,000 (9,912)

50 (4.6)

52,700 (1,475.6)

600 (55.2)

392,000 (10,976)

60 (5.52)

63,200 (1,769.6)

700 (64.4)

428,000 (11,984)

70 (6.44)

73,700 (2,063.6)

800 (73.6)

462,000 (12,936)

80 (7.36)

84,200 (2,357.6)

900 (82.8)

493,000 (13,804)

90 (8.28)

94,800 (2,654.4)

1,000 (90.2)

524,000 (14,672)

100 (9.2)

105,000 (2,940)

1,200 (110.4)

557,000 (15,596)

120 (11.04)

126,000 (3,528)

1,400 (128.8)

587,000 (16,436)

[D] For tanks and storage vessels designed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the total rate of venting shall be determined in accordance with Table F-10, except that when the exposed wetted area of the surface is greater than 2,800 square feet (257.6 m2), the total rate of venting shall be calculated by the following formula:1926.152(i)(2)(v)[D] CFH = 1,107A0.82 Where: CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour.

A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet (m2).

Note: The foregoing formula is based on Q=21,000A0.82.

[E] The total emergency relief venting capacity for any specific stable liquid may be determined by the following formula: 1926.152(i)(2)(v)[E]

V = 1337 ÷ L M V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour from Table F10.

L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific liquid in B.t.u. per pound.

M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.

[F] The required airflow rate of paragraph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section may be multiplied by the appropriate factor listed in the following schedule when protection is provided as indicated. Only one factor may be used for any one tank.

1926.152(i)(2)(v)[F]

0.5 for drainage in accordance with paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks over 200 square feet (18.4 m2) of wetted area.

0.3 for approved water spray.

0.3 for approved insulation.

0.15 for approved water spray with approved insulation.

[G] The outlet of all vents and vent drains on tanks equipped with emergency venting to permit pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to discharge in such a way as to

58

prevent localized overheating of any part of the tank, in the event vapors from such vents are ignited.1926.152(i)(2)(v)[G] [H] Each commercial tank venting device shall have stamped on it the opening pressure, the pressure at which the valve reaches the full open position, and the flow capacity at the latter pressure, expressed in cubic feet (meters) per hour of air at 60 °F. (15.55 °C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a.

1926.152(i)(2)(vi)[C]

dikes,

1926.152(i)(2)(vii)

and

walls

for

aboveground

tanks

[A] Drainage and diked areas. The area surrounding a tank or a group of tanks shall be provided with drainage as in paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or shall be diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this section, to prevent accidental discharge of liquid from endangering adjoining property or reaching waterways.1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[A] [B] Drainage. Where protection of adjoining property or waterways is by means of a natural or manmade drainage system, such systems shall comply with the following: 1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[B]

[1] [Reserved]1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[B][1] [2] The drainage system shall terminate in vacant land or other area or in an impounding basin having a capacity not smaller than that of the largest tank served. This termination area and the route of the drainage system shall be so located that, if the flammable liquids in the drainage system are ignited, the fire will not seriously expose tanks or adjoining property.1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[B][2] [C] Diked areas. Where protection of adjoining property or waterways is accomplished by retaining the liquid around the tank by means of a dike, the volume of the diked area shall comply with the following requirements:1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[C] [1] Except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this section, the volumetric capacity of the diked area shall not be less than the greatest amount of liquid that can be released from the largest tank within the diked area, assuming a full tank. The capacity of the diked area enclosing more than one tank shall be calculated by deducting the volume of the tanks other than the largest tank below the height of the dike.1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[C][1] [2] For a tank or group of tanks with fixed roofs containing crude petroleum with boilover characteristics, the volumetric capacity of the diked area shall be not less than the capacity of the largest tank served by the enclosure, assuming a full tank. The capacity of the diked enclosure shall be calculated by deducting the volume below the height of the dike of all tanks within the enclosure.1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[C][2] [3] Walls of the diked area shall be of earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry designed to be liquidtight and to withstand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height shall have a flat section at the top not less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The slope

Flammable liquids

sure. Vent pipe outlets shall be so located that flammable vapors will not enter building openings, or be trapped under eaves or other obstructions. If the vent pipe is less than 10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in nominal inside diameter, the outlet shall be provided with a vacuum and pressure relief device or there shall be an approved flame arrester located in the vent line at the outlet or within the approved distance from the outlet.

of an earthen wall shall be consistent with the angle of repose of the material of which the wall is constructed.

1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[C][3]

[4] The walls of the diked area shall be restricted to an average height of 6 feet (1.824 m) above interior grade.

1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[C][4]

[5] [Reserved]1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[C][5] [6] No loose combustible material, empty or full drum or barrel, shall be permitted within the diked area.

1926.152(i)(2)(vii)[C][6]

(viii)Tank openings other than 1926.152(i)(2)(viii)

vents

for

aboveground

1926.152(i)(3)(iv)[A]

[B] Size of vents. Each tank shall be vented through piping adequate in size to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid at the fill opening while the tank is being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside diameter.

tanks.

[A] — [C] [Reserved]1926.152(i)(2)(viii)[A] [D] Openings for gaging shall be provided with a vaportight cap or cover.1926.152(i)(2)(viii)[D] [E] For Category 2 flammable liquids or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other than crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static electricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a tank shall terminate within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank and shall be installed to avoid excessive vibration.

1926.152(i)(3)(iv)[B]

Table F-11 — Vent Line Diameters Maximum flow GPM (L)

1926.152(i)(2)(viii)[E]

1926.152(i)(3)(iii)[C]

(iv) Vents.1926.152(i)(3)(iv) [A] Location and arrangement of vents for Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C). Vent pipes from tanks storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be so located that the discharge point is outside of buildings, higher than the fill pipe opening, and not less than 12 feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent ground level. Vent pipes shall discharge only upward in order to disperse vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm) or less in nominal inside diameter shall not be obstructed by devices that will cause excessive back pres-

Pipe length1 50 feet (15.2 m)

100 feet (30.4 m)

200 feet (60.8 m)

Inches (cm)

Inches (cm)

Inches (cm)

100 (378.5)

1 1

⁄4 (3.175)

200 (757)

1 ⁄4 (3.175)

1

300 (1,135.5)

1 ⁄4 (3.175)

1

400 (1,514)

1 1 ⁄4 (3.175)

500 (1,892.5)

1 1

1

1 ⁄2 (3.81)

2 (5.08)

600 (2,271)

1

1 ⁄2 (3.81)

2 (5.08)

2 (5.08)

700 (2,649.5)

2 (5.08)

2 (5.08)

2 (5.08)

800 (3,028)

2 (5.08)

2 (5.08)

3 (7.62)

900 (3,406.5)

2 (5.08)

2 (5.08)

3 (7.62)

1,000 (3,785)

2 (5.08)

2 (5.08)

3 (7.62)

⁄2 (3.81)

1

1 ⁄4 (3.175)

1 ⁄4 (3.175)

1

1 ⁄4 (3.175)

1

1 ⁄4 (3.175)

1 ⁄4 (3.175)

1

1 ⁄2 (3.81)

1 1 ⁄2 (3.81)

2 (5.08)

1

1

1

Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.

[C] Location and arrangement of vents for Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids. Vent pipes from tanks storing Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids shall terminate outside of the building and higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent outlets shall be above normal snow level. They may be fitted with return bends, coarse screens or other devices to minimize ingress of foreign material.

1926.152(i)(3)(iv)[C]

[D] Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) of this section. Vent pipes shall be so laid as to drain toward the tank without sags or traps in which liquid can collect. They shall be located so that they will not be subjected to physical damage. The tank end of the vent pipe shall enter the tank through the top.1926.152(i)(3)(iv)[D] [E] When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are filled simultaneously.1926.152(i)(3)(iv)[E] (v) Tank openings other than vents.1926.152(i)(3)(v) [A] Connections for all tank openings shall be vapor or liquid tight.1926.152(i)(3)(v)[A] [B] Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe, shall be provided with a liquid-tight cap or cover. If inside a building, each such opening shall be protected against liquid overflow and possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded check valve or other approved device.

1926.152(i)(3)(v)[B]

[C] Fill and discharge lines shall enter tanks only through the top. Fill lines shall be sloped toward the tank.

1926

[D] For Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other than crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static electricity by terminating within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank.1926.152(i)(3)(v)[D] [E] Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building opening. Such connection shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The connection shall be properly identified.1926.152(i)(3)(v)[E]

Construction Standards

[F] Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building opening. Such connection shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The connection shall be properly identified.1926.152(i)(2)(viii)[F] (3) Installation of underground tanks1926.152(i)(3) (i) Location. Evacuation for underground storage tanks shall be made with due care to avoid undermining of foundations of existing structures. Underground tanks or tanks under buildings shall be so located with respect to existing building foundations and supports that the loads carried by the latter cannot be transmitted to the tank. The distance from any part of a tank storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), to the nearest wall of any basement or pit shall be not less than 1 foot (0.304 m), and to any property line that may be built upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912 m). The distance from any part of a tank storing Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids to the nearest wall of any basement, pit or property line shall be not less than 1 foot (0.304 m).1926.152(i)(3)(i) (ii) Depth and cover. Underground tanks shall be set on firm foundations and surrounded with at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of noncorrosive, inert materials such as clean sand, earth, or gravel well tamped in place. The tank shall be placed in the hole with care since dropping or rolling the tank into the hole can break a weld, puncture or damage the tank, or scrape off the protective coating of coated tanks. Tanks shall be covered with a minimum of 2 feet (0.608 m) of earth, or shall be covered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m) of earth, on top of which shall be placed a slab of reinforced concrete not less than 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick. When underground tanks are, or are likely to be, subject to traffic, they shall be protected against damage from vehicles passing over them by at least 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover, or 18 inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth, plus 6 inches (15.24 cm) of reinforced concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of asphaltic concrete. When asphaltic or reinforced concrete paving is used as part of the protection, it shall extend at least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally beyond the outline of the tank in all directions.1926.152(i)(3)(ii) (iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion protection for the tank and its piping shall be provided by one or more of the following methods:1926.152(i)(3)(iii) [A] Use of protective coatings or wrappings;1926.152(i)(3)(iii)[A] [B] Cathodic protection; or,1926.152(i)(3)(iii)[B] [C] Corrosion resistant materials of construction.

§1926.152(i)

1926.152(i)(3)(v)[C]

59

§1926.152

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

(4) Installation of tanks inside of buildings1926.152(i)(4) (i) Location. Tanks shall not be permitted inside of buildings except as provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or (i) of this section.

1926.152(i)(4)(i)

(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of buildings shall be as provided in paragraphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv) of this section, except that emergency venting by the use of weak roof seams on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents shall discharge vapors outside the buildings.1926.152(i)(4)(ii) (iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.1926.152(i)(4)(iii) (iv) Tank openings other than vents.1926.152(i)(4)(iv) [A] Connections for all tank openings shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are covered in paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this section.

1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[A]

[B] Each connection to a tank inside of buildings through which liquid can normally flow shall be provided with an internal or an external valve located as close as practical to the shell of the tank. Such valves, when external, and their connections to the tank shall be of steel except when the chemical characteristics of the liquid stored are incompatible with steel.

When materials other than steel are necessary, they shall be suitable for the pressures, structural stresses, and temperatures involved, including fire exposures.1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[B] [C] Flammable liquid tanks located inside of buildings, except in one-story buildings designed and protected for flammable liquid storage, shall be provided with an automatic-closing heat-actuated valve on each withdrawal connection below the liquid level, except for connections used for emergency disposal, to prevent continued flow in the event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. This function may be incorporated in the valve required in paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a separate valve, shall be located adjacent to the valve required in paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section.

1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[C]

[D] Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe (see paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall be provided with a vaportight cap or cover. Each such opening shall be protected against liquid overflow and possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded check valve or other approved device.1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[D] [E] For Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other than crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static electricity by terminating within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank.1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[E] [F] The fill pipe inside of the tank shall be installed to avoid excessive vibration of the pipe.1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[F] [G] The inlet of the fill pipe shall be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building opening. The inlet of the fill pipe shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The fill connection shall be properly identified.

1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[G]

[H] Tanks inside buildings shall be equipped with a device, or other means shall be provided, to prevent overflow into the building.1926.152(i)(4)(iv)[H] (5) Supports, foundations, and anchorage for all tank locations 1926.152(i)(5)

(i) General. Tank supports shall be installed on firm foundations.

Tank supports shall be of concrete, masonry, or protected steel.

Single wood timber supports (not cribbing) laid horizontally may be used for outside aboveground tanks if not more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at their lowest point.1926.152(i)(5)(i) (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or exposed piling shall be protected by materials having a fire resistance rating of not less than 2 hours, except that steel saddles need not be protected if less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at their lowest point. Water spray protection or its equivalent may be used in lieu of fireresistive materials to protect supports.1926.152(i)(5)(ii) (iii) Spheres. The design of the supporting structure for tanks such as spheres shall receive special engineering consideration.

1926.152(i)(5)(iii)

(iv) Load distribution. Every tank shall be so supported as to prevent the excessive concentration of loads on the supporting portion of the shell.1926.152(i)(5)(iv) (v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on the ground or on foundations made of concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. Tank foundations shall be designed to minimize the possibility of uneven settling of the tank and to minimize corrosion in any part of the tank resting on the foundation.1926.152(i)(5)(v)

60

(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is located in an area that may be subjected to flooding, the applicable precautions outlined in this subdivision shall be observed.1926.152(i)(5)(vi) [A] No aboveground vertical storage tank containing a flammable liquid shall be located so that the allowable liquid level within the tank is below the established maximum flood stage, unless the tank is provided with a guiding structure such as described in paragraphs (i)(5)(vi) (M), (N), and (O) of this section.1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[A] [B] Independent water supply facilities shall be provided at locations where there is no ample and dependable public water supply available for loading partially empty tanks with water.

1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[B]

[C] In addition to the preceding requirements, each tank so located that more than 70 percent, but less than 100 percent, of its allowable liquid storage capacity will be submerged at the established maximum flood stage, shall be safeguarded by one of the following methods: Tank shall be raised, or its height shall be increased, until its top extends above the maximum flood stage a distance equivalent to 30 percent or more of its allowable liquid storage capacity: Provided, however, That the submerged part of the tank shall not exceed two and one-half times the diameter. Or, as an alternative to the foregoing, adequate noncombustible structural guides, designed to permit the tank to float vertically without loss of product, shall be provided.1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[C] [D] Each horizontal tank so located that more than 70 percent of its storage capacity will be submerged at the established flood stage, shall be anchored, attached to a foundation of concrete or of steel and concrete, of sufficient weight to provide adequate load for the tank when filled with flammable liquid and submerged by flood waters to the established flood stage, or adequately secured by other means.

1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[D]

[E] [Reserved]1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[E] [F] At locations where there is no ample and dependable water supply, or where filling of underground tanks with liquids is impracticable because of the character of their contents, their use, or for other reasons, each tank shall be safeguarded against movement when empty and submerged by high ground water or flood waters by anchoring, weighting with concrete or other approved solid loading material, or securing by other means. Each such tank shall be so constructed and installed that it will safely resist external pressures due to high ground water or flood waters.

1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[F]

[G] At locations where there is an ample and dependable water supply available, underground tanks containing flammable liquids, so installed that more than 70 percent of their storage capacity will be submerged at the maximum flood stage, shall be so anchored, weighted, or secured by other means, as to prevent movement of such tanks when filled with flammable liquids, and submerged by flood waters to the established flood stage.1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[G] [H] Pipe connections below the allowable liquid level in a tank shall be provided with valves or cocks located as closely as practicable to the tank shell. Such valves and their connections to tanks shall be of steel or other material suitable for use with the liquid being stored. Cast iron shall not be permitted.1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[H] [I] At locations where an independent water supply is required, it shall be entirely independent of public power and water supply. Independent source of water shall be available when flood waters reach a level not less than 10 feet (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest tank on a property.

1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[I]

[J] The self-contained power and pumping unit shall be so located or so designed that pumping into tanks may be carried on continuously throughout the rise in flood waters from a level 10 feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to the level of the potential flood stage.1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[J] [K] Capacity of the pumping unit shall be such that the rate of rise of water in all tanks shall be equivalent to the established potential average rate of rise of flood waters at any stage.

1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[K]

[L] Each independent pumping unit shall be tested periodically to insure that it is in satisfactory operating condition.

1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[L]

[M] Structural guides for holding floating tanks above their foundations shall be so designed that there will be no resistance to the free rise of a tank, and shall be constructed of noncombustible material.1926.152(i)(5)(vi)[M] [N] The strength of the structure shall be adequate to resist lateral movement of a tank subject to a horizontal force in any direction equivalent to not less than 25 pounds per square

Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas) (d) Safety devices.1926.153(d) (1) Every container and every vaporizer shall be provided with one or more approved safety relief valves or devices. These valves shall be arranged to afford free vent to the outer air with discharge not less than 5 feet horizontally away from any opening into a building which is below such discharge.1926.153(d)(1) (2) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety relief device and the container, or the equipment or piping to which the safety relief device is connected, except that a shutoff valve may be used where the arrangement of this valve is such that full required capacity flow through the safety relief device is always afforded.1926.153(d)(2) (3) Container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents shall be located not less than 5 feet in any direction from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical ventilation air intakes.1926.153(d)(3) (e) Dispensing.1926.153(e) (1) Filling of fuel containers for trucks or motor vehicles from bulk storage containers shall be performed not less than 10 feet from the nearest masonry-walled building, or not less than 25 feet from the nearest building or other construction and, in any event, not less than 25 feet from any building opening.1926.153(e)(1) (2) Filling of portable containers or containers mounted on skids from storage containers shall be performed not less than 50 feet from the nearest building.1926.153(e)(2) (f) Requirements for appliances.1926.153(f) (1) LP-Gas consuming appliances shall be approved types.

1926.153(f)(1)

Note: The provisions of this subparagraph do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500 B.t.u. per hour input when used with containers having a maximum water capac-

1

ity of 2 ⁄2 pounds.

(9) Container valves, connectors, regulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing shall not be used as structural supports for heaters.

1926.153(h)(9)

(10) Containers, regulating equipment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose shall be located to minimize exposure to high temperatures or physical damage.1926.153(h)(10) (11) Containers having a water capacity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for use shall stand on a firm and substantially level surface and, when necessary, shall be secured in an upright position.1926.153(h)(11) (12) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be 245 pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas capacity).1926.153(h)(12) (13) For temporary heating, heaters (other than integral heater- container units) shall be located at least 6 feet from any LP-Gas container. This shall not prohibit the use of heaters specifically designed for attachment to the container or to a supporting standard, provided they are designed and installed so as to prevent direct or radiant heat application from the heater onto the containers. Blower and radiant type heaters shall not be directed toward any LP-Gas container within 20 feet.1926.153(h)(13) (14) If two or more heater-container units, of either the integral or nonintegral type, are located in an unpartitioned area on the same floor, the container or containers of each unit shall be separated from the container or containers of any other unit by at least 20 feet.1926.153(h)(14) (15) When heaters are connected to containers for use in an unpartitioned area on the same floor, the total water capacity of containers, manifolded together for connection to a heater or heaters, shall not be greater than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds LPGas capacity). Such manifolds shall be separated by at least 20 feet.1926.153(h)(15) (16) Storage of containers awaiting use shall be in accordance with paragraphs (j) and (k) of this section.1926.153(h)(16) (i) Multiple container systems.1926.153(i) (1) Valves in the assembly of multiple container systems shall be arranged so that replacement of containers can be made without shutting off the flow of gas in the system. This provision is not to be construed as requiring an automatic changeover device.

1926.153(i)(1)

(2) Heaters shall be equipped with an approved regulator in the supply line between the fuel cylinder and the heater unit. Cylinder connectors shall be provided with an excess flow valve to minimize the flow of gas in the event the fuel line becomes ruptured.

1926.153(i)(2)

(3) Regulators and low-pressure relief devices shall be rigidly attached to the cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting standards, the building walls, or otherwise rigidly secured, and shall be so installed or protected from the elements.1926.153(i)(3) (j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage of LPG within buildings is prohibited. 1926.153(j) (k) Storage outside of buildings.1926.153(k) (1) Storage outside of buildings, for containers awaiting use, shall be located from the nearest building or group of buildings, in accordance with the following:1926.153(k)(1) Table F-3

Quantity of LP-Gas stored

Distance (feet)

500 lbs. or less

0

501 to 6,000 lbs

10

6,001 to 10,000 lbs

20

Over 10,000 lbs

25

(2) Containers shall be in a suitable ventilated enclosure or otherwise protected against tampering.1926.153(k)(2) (l) Fire protection. Storage locations shall be provided with at least one approved portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B:C. 1926.153(l) (m) Systems utilizing containers other than DOT containers — 1926.153(m)

(1) Application. This paragraph applies specifically to systems utilizing storage containers other than those constructed in accordance with DOT specifications. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph unless otherwise noted in paragraph (b) of this section.1926.153(m)(1)

63

1926 Construction Standards

(2) Any appliance that was originally manufactured for operation with a gaseous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in good condition, may be used with LP-Gas only after it is properly converted, adapted, and tested for performance with LP-Gas before the appliance is placed in use.1926.153(f)(2) (g) Containers and regulating equipment installed outside of buildings or structures. Containers shall be upright upon firm foundations or otherwise firmly secured. The possible effect on the outlet piping of settling shall be guarded against by a flexible connection or special fitting. 1926.153(g) (h) Containers and equipment used inside of buildings or structures.1926.153(h) (1) When operational requirements make portable use of containers necessary, and their location outside of buildings or structures is impracticable, containers and equipment shall be permitted to be used inside of buildings or structures in accordance with paragraphs (h)(2) through (11) of this section.1926.153(h)(1) (2) Containers in use means connected for use.

(3) Systems utilizing containers having a water capacity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) shall be equipped with excess flow valves. Such excess flow valves shall be either integral with the container valves or in the connections to the container valve outlets.1926.153(h)(3) (4) Regulators shall be either directly connected to the container valves or to manifolds connected to the container valves. The regulator shall be suitable for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fittings connecting containers to pressure regulator inlets shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure.1926.153(h)(4) (5) Valves on containers having water capacity greater than 50 pounds (nominal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be protected from damage while in use or storage.1926.153(h)(5) (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall not be used.1926.153(h)(6) (7)  Hose shall be designed for a working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. Design, construction, and performance of hose, and hose connections shall have their suitability determined by listing by a nationally recognized testing agency. The hose length shall be as short as practicable. Hoses shall be long enough to permit compliance with spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) through (13) of this section, without kinking or straining, or causing hose to be so close to a burner as to be damaged by heat.1926.153(h)(7) (8) Portable heaters, including salamanders, shall be equipped with an approved automatic device to shut off the flow of gas to the main burner, and pilot if used, in the event of flame failure. Such heaters, having inputs above 50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped with either a pilot, which must be lighted and proved before the main burner can be turned on, or an electrical ignition system.1926.153(h)(8)

§1926.153(m)

§1926.154

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

(2) Design pressure and classification of storage containers. Storage containers shall be designed and classified in accordance with Table F-31.1926.153(m)(2)

Table F-31

Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage 1949 edition of For gases with ASME Code vapor press. Not to (Par. U-200, U- 201); Container 1949 and earlier exceed lb. per sq.

1950, 1952, 1956, type editions of in. gage at 100 °F. 1959, 1962, 1965, and ASME Code (37.8 °C.) 1968 (Division 1) (Par. U-68, U-69) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code3

Table F-4

Minimum clearance, (inches) Heating appliances

Sides

Rear

Chimney connector

1

80

1

80

1

80

1

100

Room heater, circulating type

12

12

18

100

100

100

125

Room heater, radiant type

36

36

18

125

125

125

156

150

150

150

187

175

175

175

219

2200

215

200

250

1New storage containers of the 80 type have not been authorized since Dec. 31, 1947.

2Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum design pressure of

containers shall be 100% of the container type designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of the container type designation when constructed under: (1) the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U-200 and U-201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code.

3Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized after July 1, 1961.

(3) Containers with foundations attached (portable or semiportable b containers with suitable steel "runners" or "skids" and popularly known in the industry as "skid tanks") shall be designed, installed, and used in accordance with these rules subject to the following provisions:1926.153(m)(3) (i) If they are to be used at a given general location for a temporary period not to exceed 6 months they need not have fireresisting foundations or saddles but shall have adequate ferrous metal supports.1926.153(m)(3)(i) (ii) They shall not be located with the outside bottom of the container shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above the surface of the ground unless fire-resisting supports are provided.

1926.153(m)(3)(ii)

(iii) The bottom of the skids shall not be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the outside bottom of the container shell.1926.153(m)(3)(iii) (iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings, and the like, having communication with the interior of the container, shall be protected against physical damage.1926.153(m)(3)(iv) (v) When not permanently located on fire-resisting foundations, piping connections shall be sufficiently flexible to minimize the possibility of breakage or leakage of connections if the container settles, moves, or is otherwise displaced.1926.153(m)(3)(v) (vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of skids, shall be secured to the container in accordance with the code or rules under which the container is designed and built (with a minimum factor of safety of four) to withstand loading in any direction equal to four times the weight of the container and attachments when filled to the maximum permissible loaded weight.1926.153(m)(3)(vi) (4) Field welding where necessary shall be made only on saddle plates or brackets which were applied by the manufacturer of the tank.1926.153(m)(4) (n) When LP-Gas and one or more other gases are stored or used in the same area, the containers shall be marked to identify their content. Marking shall be in compliance with American National Standard Z48.1- 1954, "Method of Marking Portable Compressed Gas Containers To Identify the Material Contained."

1926.153(n)

(o) Damage from vehicles. When damage to LP-Gas systems from vehicular traffic is a possibility, precautions against such damage shall be taken. 1926.153(o)

§1926.154 Temporary heating devices

(a) Ventilation.1926.154(a) (1) Fresh air shall be supplied in sufficient quantities to maintain the health and safety of workmen. Where natural means of fresh air supply is inadequate, mechanical ventilation shall be provided.

1926.154(a)(1)

64

(2) When heaters are used in confined spaces, special care shall be taken to provide sufficient ventilation in order to ensure proper combustion, maintain the health and safety of workmen, and limit temperature rise in the area.1926.154(a)(2) (b) Clearance and mounting.1926.154(b) (1) Temporary heating devices shall be installed to provide clearance to combustible material not less than the amount shown in Table F-4.1926.154(b)(1) (2) Temporary heating devices, which are listed for installation with lesser clearances than specified in Table F-4, may be installed in accordance with their approval.1926.154(b)(2)

(3) Heaters not suitable for use on wood floors shall not be set directly upon them or other combustible materials. When such heaters are used, they shall rest on suitable heat insulating material or at least 1-inch concrete, or equivalent. The insulating material shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or more in all directions.1926.154(b)(3) (4) Heaters used in the vicinity of combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or similar coverings shall be located at least 10 feet from the coverings. The coverings shall be securely fastened to prevent ignition or upsetting of the heater due to wind action on the covering or other material.1926.154(b)(4) (c) Stability. Heaters, when in use, shall be set horizontally level, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's markings.

1926.154(c)

(d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel salamanders are prohibited in buildings and on scaffolds. 1926.154(d) (e) Oil-fired heaters.1926.154(e) (1) Flammable liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped with a primary safety control to stop the flow of fuel in the event of flame failure.

Barometric or gravity oil feed shall not be considered a primary safety control.1926.154(e)(1) (2) Heaters designed for barometric or gravity oil feed shall be used only with the integral tanks.1926.154(e)(2) (3) [Reserved]1926.154(e)(3) (4) Heaters specifically designed and approved for use with separate supply tanks may be directly connected for gravity feed, or an automatic pump, from a supply tank.1926.154(e)(4)

§1926.155 Definitions applicable to this subpart

(a)  Approved, for the purpose of this subpart, means equipment that has been listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Federal agencies such as Bureau of Mines, or U.S. Coast Guard, which issue approvals for such equipment. (b) Closed container means a container so sealed by means of a lid or other device that neither liquid nor vapor will escape from it at ordinary temperatures. (c)  [Reserved] (d) Combustion means any chemical process that involves oxidation sufficient to produce light or heat. (e) Fire brigade means an organized group of employees that are knowledgeable, trained, and skilled in the safe evacuation of employees during emergency situations and in assisting in fire fighting operations. (f) Fire resistance means so resistant to fire that, for specified time and under conditions of a standard heat intensity, it will not fail structurally and will not permit the side away from the fire to become hotter than a specified temperature. For purposes of this part, fire resistance shall be determined by the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, NFPA 2511969. (g) Flammable means capable of being easily ignited, burning intensely, or having a rapid rate of flame spread. (h)  Flammable liquid means any liquid having a vapor pressure not exceeding 40 pounds per square inch (absolute) at 100 °F (37.8 °C) and having a flashpoint at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C).

Flammable liquids are divided into four categories as follows: (1) Category 1 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) and having a boiling point at or below 95 °F (35 °C).

Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart (2) Category 2 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) and having a boiling point above 95 °F (35 °C).

(3) Category 3 shall include liquids having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F (23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C).

(4) Category 4 shall include liquids having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). (i) Flash point of the liquid means the temperature at which it gives off vapor sufficient to form an ignitable mixture with the air near the surface of the liquid or within the vessel used as determined by appropriate test procedure and apparatus as specified below.

(1) The flashpoint of liquids having a viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Universal Second(s) at 100 °F (37.8 °C) and a flashpoint below 175 °F (79.4 °C) shall be determined in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM D-56-69 (incorporated by reference; See §1926.6), or an equivalent method as defined by §1910.1200 appendix B. (2) The flashpoints of liquids having a viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Second(s) or more at 175 °F (79.4 °C) or higher shall be determined in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens Closed Tester, ASTM D-9369 (incorporated by reference; See §1926.6), or an equivalent method as defined by §1910.1200 appendix B. (j)  Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and LP Gas mean and include any material which is composed predominantly of any of the following hydrocarbons, or mixtures of them, such as propane, propylene, butane (normal butane or iso-butane), and butylenes. (k) Portable tank means a closed container having a liquid capacity more than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended for fixed installation. (l)  Safety can means an approved closed container, of not more than 5 gallons capacity, having a flash-arresting screen, springclosing lid and spout cover and so designed that it will safely relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire exposure. (m) Vapor pressure means the pressure, measured in pounds per square inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile liquid as determined by the "Standard Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid Method)." (ASTM D-323-58).

§1926.450 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart

used to provide footing on sloped surfaces such as crawling boards.

Competent person means one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.

Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold) means a two- point or multi- point adjustable suspension scaffold constructed using a series of interconnected braced scaffold members or supporting structures erected to form a continuous scaffold.

Coupler means a device for locking together the tubes of a tube and coupler scaffold.

Crawling board (chicken ladder) means a supported scaffold consisting of a plank with cleats spaced and secured to provide footing, for use on sloped surfaces such as roofs.

Deceleration device means any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip- stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyard, or automatic self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which dissipates a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest or limits the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.

Double pole (independent pole) scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform(s) resting on cross beams (bearers) supported by ledgers and a double row of uprights independent of support (except ties, guys, braces) from any structure.

Equivalent means alternative designs, materials or methods to protect against a hazard which the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the methods, materials or designs specified in the standard.

Exposed power lines means electrical power lines which are accessible to employees and which are not shielded from contact. Such lines do not include extension cords or power tool cords.

Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or without a thimble at the end of a wire rope.

Fabricated decking and planking means manufactured platforms made of wood (including laminated wood, and solid sawn wood planks), metal or other materials.

Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular welded frame scaffold) means a scaffold consisting of a platform(s) supported on fabricated end frames with integral posts, horizontal bearers, and intermediate members.

Failure means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded.

Float (ship) scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a braced platform resting on two parallel bearers and hung from overhead supports by ropes of fixed length.

Form scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform supported by brackets attached to formwork.

Guardrail system means a vertical barrier, consisting of, but not limited to, toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to prevent employees from falling off a scaffold platform or walkway to lower levels.

Hoist means a manual or power-operated mechanical device to raise or lower a suspended scaffold.

Horse scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform supported by construction horses (saw horses). Horse scaffolds constructed of metal are sometimes known as trestle scaffolds.

Independent pole scaffold (see "Double pole scaffold").

Interior hung scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a platform suspended from the ceiling or roof structure by fixed length supports.

Ladder jack scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform resting on brackets attached to ladders.

Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed-size, self-supporting ladder consisting of a wide flat tread ladder in the form of stairs.

Landing means a platform at the end of a flight of stairs.

Large area scaffold means a pole scaffold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold erected over substantially the entire work area. For example: a scaffold erected over the entire floor area of a room.

Lean-to scaffold means a supported scaffold which is kept erect by tilting it toward and resting it against a building or structure.

Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line that connects to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or that connects to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage.

Lower levels means areas below the level where the employee is located and to which an employee can fall. Such areas include,

65

1926 Construction Standards

(a)  Scope and application. This subpart applies to all scaffolds used in workplaces covered by this part. It does not apply to crane or derrick suspended personnel platforms. The criteria for aerial lifts are set out exclusively in §1926.453. 1926.450(a) (b)  Definitions.

Adjustable suspension scaffold means a suspension scaffold equipped with a hoist(s) that can be operated by an employee(s) on the scaffold.

Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal transverse scaffold member (which may be supported by ledgers or runners) upon which the scaffold platform rests and which joins scaffold uprights, posts, poles, and similar members.

Boatswains' chair means a single-point adjustable suspension scaffold consisting of a seat or sling designed to support one employee in a sitting position.

Body belt (safety belt) means a strap with means both for securing it about the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device.

Body harness means a design of straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner to distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders, with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system.

Brace means a rigid connection that holds one scaffold member in a fixed position with respect to another member, or to a building or structure.

Bricklayers' square scaffold means a supported scaffold composed of framed squares which support a platform.

Carpenters' bracket scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform supported by brackets attached to building or structural walls.

Catenary scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a platform supported by two essentially horizontal and parallel ropes attached to structural members of a building or other structure.

Additional support may be provided by vertical pickups.

Chimney hoist means a multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold used to provide access to work inside chimneys. (See "Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold".)

Cleat means a structural block used at the end of a platform to prevent the platform from slipping off its supports. Cleats are also

§1926.450(b)

§1926.451

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, materials, water, and equipment.

Masons' adjustable supported scaffold (see "Self-contained adjustable scaffold").

Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a continuous run suspension scaffold designed and used for masonry operations.

Maximum intended load means the total load of all persons, equipment, tools, materials, transmitted loads, and other loads reasonably anticipated to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold component at any one time.

Mobile scaffold means a powered or unpowered, portable, caster or wheel-mounted supported scaffold.

Multi-level suspended scaffold means a two-point or multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold with a series of platforms at various levels resting on common stirrups.

Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a platform(s) which is suspended by more than two ropes from overhead supports and equipped with means to raise and lower the platform to desired work levels. Such scaffolds include chimney hoists.

Needle beam scaffold means a platform suspended from needle beams.

Open sides and ends means the edges of a platform that are more than 14 inches (36 cm) away horizontally from a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface (such as a building wall) or a sturdy, continuous horizontal surface (such as a floor), or a point of access.

Exception: For plastering and lathing operations the horizontal threshold distance is 18 inches (46 cm).

Outrigger means the structural member of a supported scaffold used to increase the base width of a scaffold in order to provide support for and increased stability of the scaffold.

Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the structural member of a suspension scaffold or outrigger scaffold which provides support for the scaffold by extending the scaffold point of attachment to a point out and away from the structure or building.

Outrigger scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform resting on outrigger beams (thrustouts) projecting beyond the wall or face of the building or structure, the inboard ends of which are secured inside the building or structure.

Overhand bricklaying means the process of laying bricks and masonry units such that the surface of the wall to be jointed is on the opposite side of the wall from the mason, requiring the mason to lean over the wall to complete the work. It includes mason tending and electrical installation incorporated into the brick wall during the overhand bricklaying process.

Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an employee's fall. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or combinations of these.

Platform means a work surface elevated above lower levels. Platforms can be constructed using individual wood planks, fabricated planks, fabricated decks, and fabricated platforms.

Pole scaffold (see definitions for "Single-pole scaffold" and "Double (independent) pole scaffold").

Power operated hoist means a hoist which is powered by other than human energy.

Pump jack scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform supported by vertical poles and movable support brackets.

Qualified means one who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.

Rated load means the manufacturer's specified maximum load to be lifted by a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold component.

Repair bracket scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform supported by brackets which are secured in place around the circumference or perimeter of a chimney, stack, tank or other supporting structure by one or more wire ropes placed around the supporting structure.

Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop supported scaffold consisting of a platform resting on angular-shaped supports.

Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the lengthwise horizontal spacing or bracing member which may support the bearers.

Scaffold means any temporary elevated platform (supported or suspended) and its supporting structure (including points of anchorage), used for supporting employees or materials or both.

66

Self-contained adjustable scaffold means a combination supported and suspension scaffold consisting of an adjustable platform(s) mounted on an independent supporting frame(s) not a part of the object being worked on, and which is equipped with a means to permit the raising and lowering of the platform(s). Such systems include rolling roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems, and some masons' adjustable supported scaffolds.

Shore scaffold means a supported scaffold which is placed against a building or structure and held in place with props.

Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a platform suspended by one rope from an overhead support and equipped with means to permit the movement of the platform to desired work levels.

Single-pole scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform(s) resting on bearers, the outside ends of which are supported on runners secured to a single row of posts or uprights, and the inner ends of which are supported on or in a structure or building wall.

Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower) means a tower comprised of scaffold components and which contains internal stairway units and rest platforms. These towers are used to provide access to scaffold platforms and other elevated points such as floors and roofs.

Stall load means the load at which the prime-mover of a power- operated hoist stalls or the power to the prime-mover is automatically disconnected.

Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold means a platform resting directly on the rungs of step ladders or trestle ladders.

Stilts means a pair of poles or similar supports with raised footrests, used to permit walking above the ground or working surface.

Stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a continuous run suspension scaffold designed and used for stonesetters' operations.

Supported scaffold means one or more platforms supported by outrigger beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights, posts, frames, or similar rigid support.

Suspension scaffold means one or more platforms suspended by ropes or other non-rigid means from an overhead structure(s).

System scaffold means a scaffold consisting of posts with fixed connection points that accept runners, bearers, and diagonals that can be interconnected at predetermined levels.

Tank builders' scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform resting on brackets that are either directly attached to a cylindrical tank or attached to devices that are attached to such a tank.

Top plate bracket scaffold means a scaffold supported by brackets that hook over or are attached to the top of a wall. This type of scaffold is similar to carpenters' bracket scaffolds and form scaffolds and is used in residential construction for setting trusses.

Tube and coupler scaffold means a supported or suspended scaffold consisting of a platform(s) supported by tubing, erected with coupling devices connecting uprights, braces, bearers, and runners.

Tubular welded frame scaffold (see "Fabricated frame scaffold").

Two-point suspension scaffold (swing stage) means a suspension scaffold consisting of a platform supported by hangers (stirrups) suspended by two ropes from overhead supports and equipped with means to permit the raising and lowering of the platform to desired work levels.

Unstable objects means items whose strength, configuration, or lack of stability may allow them to become dislocated and shift and therefore may not properly support the loads imposed on them.

Unstable objects do not constitute a safe base support for scaffolds, platforms, or employees. Examples include, but are not limited to, barrels, boxes, loose brick, and concrete blocks.

Vertical pickup means a rope used to support the horizontal rope in catenary scaffolds.

Walkway means a portion of a scaffold platform used only for access and not as a work level.

Window jack scaffold means a platform resting on a bracket or jack which projects through a window opening.

§1926.451 General requirements

This section does not apply to aerial lifts, the criteria for which are set out exclusively in §1926.453. (a)  Capacity.1926.451(a)

General requirements

§1926.451(c)

(1)  Except as provided in paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), (a)(5) and (g) of this section, each scaffold and scaffold component shall be capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and at least 4 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to it.1926.451(a)(1) (2)  Direct connections to roofs and floors, and counterweights used to balance adjustable suspension scaffolds, shall be capable of resisting at least 4 times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at the rated load of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.1926.451(a)(2) (3)  Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on non-adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that rope.1926.451(a)(3) (4)  Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that rope with the scaffold operating at either the rated load of the hoist, or 2 (minimum) times the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.1926.451(a)(4) (5)  The stall load of any scaffold hoist shall not exceed 3 times its rated load.1926.451(a)(5) (6)  Scaffolds shall be designed by a qualified person and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with that design. Non-mandatory Appendix A to this subpart contains examples of criteria that will enable an employer to comply with paragraph (a) of this section.1926.451(a)(6) (b)  Scaffold platform construction.1926.451(b) (1)  Each platform on all working levels of scaffolds shall be fully planked or decked between the front uprights and the guardrail supports as follows:1926.451(b)(1) (i)  Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold plank, fabricated plank, fabricated deck, or fabricated platform) shall be installed so that the space between adjacent units and the space between the platform and the uprights is no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where the employer can demonstrate that a wider space is necessary (for example, to fit around uprights when side brackets are used to extend the width of the platform).

(5) (i)  Each end of a platform 10 feet or less in length shall not extend over its support more than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platform is designed and installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support employees and/or materials without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to the cantilevered end.1926.451(b)(5)(i) (ii)  Each platform greater than 10 feet in length shall not extend over its support more than 18 inches (46 cm), unless it is designed and installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support employees without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to the cantilevered end.1926.451(b)(5)(ii) (6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks are abutted to create a long platform, each abutted end shall rest on a separate support surface. This provision does not preclude the use of common support members, such as "T" sections, to support abutting planks, or hook on platforms designed to rest on common supports.

(ii) Where the employer makes the demonstration provided for in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the platform shall be planked or decked as fully as possible and the remaining open space between the platform and the uprights shall not exceed 91⁄2 inches (24.1 cm).1926.451(b)(1)(ii)

(11) Scaffold components made of dissimilar metals shall not be used together unless a competent person has determined that galvanic action will not reduce the strength of any component to a level below that required by paragraph (a)(1) of this section.

1926.451(b)(1)(i)

Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The requirement in paragraph (b)(1) to provide full planking or decking does not apply to platforms used solely as walkways or solely by employees performing scaffold erection or dismantling. In these situations, only the planking that the employer establishes is necessary to provide safe working conditions is required.

(2)  Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section, each scaffold platform and walkway shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide.1926.451(b)(2) (i)  Each ladder jack scaffold, top plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide. There is no minimum width requirement for boatswains' chairs.1926.451(b)(2)(i) Note to paragraph (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to an administrative stay effective November 29, 1996 and published in the Federal Register on November 25, 1996, the requirement in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof bracket scaffolds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed until November 25, 1997 or until rulemaking regarding the minimum width of roof bracket scaffolds has been completed, whichever is later.

(ii)  Where scaffolds must be used in areas that the employer can demonstrate are so narrow that platforms and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and walkways shall be as wide as feasible, and employees on those platforms and walkways shall be protected from fall hazards by the use of guardrails and/or personal fall arrest systems.

1926.451(b)(2)(ii)

1926.451(b)(7)

(8)  At all points of a scaffold where the platform changes direction, such as turning a corner, any platform that rests on a bearer at an angle other than a right angle shall be laid first, and platforms which rest at right angles over the same bearer shall be laid second, on top of the first platform.1926.451(b)(8) (9) Wood platforms shall not be covered with opaque finishes, except that platform edges may be covered or marked for identification.

Platforms may be coated periodically with wood preservatives, fire- retardant finishes, and slip-resistant finishes; however, the coating may not obscure the top or bottom wood surfaces.

1926.451(b)(9)

(10) Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be intermixed unless the components fit together without force and the scaffold's structural integrity is maintained by the user. Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be modified in order to intermix them unless a competent person determines the resulting scaffold is structurally sound.

1926.451(b)(10)

1926.451(b)(11)

(c)  Criteria for supported scaffolds.1926.451(c) (1)  Supported scaffolds with a height to base width (including outrigger supports, if used) ratio of more than four to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tipping by guying, tying, bracing, or equivalent means, as follows:1926.451(c)(1) (i)  Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed at locations where horizontal members support both inner and outer legs.

1926.451(c)(1)(i)

(ii)  Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according to the scaffold manufacturer's recommendations or at the closest horizontal member to the 4:1 height and be repeated vertically at locations of horizontal members every 20 feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaffolds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) wide. The top guy, tie or brace of completed scaffolds shall be placed no further than the 4:1 height from the top. Such guys, ties and braces shall be installed at each end of the scaffold and at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end [not both] towards the other).

1926.451(c)(1)(ii)

(iii)  Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers shall be used to prevent the tipping of supported scaffolds in all circumstances where an eccentric load, such as a cantilevered work platform, is applied or is transmitted to the scaffold.1926.451(c)(1)(iii) (2)  Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear on base plates and mud sills or other adequate firm foundation.1926.451(c)(2) (i)  Footings shall be level, sound, rigid, and capable of supporting the loaded scaffold without settling or displacement.

1926.451(c)(2)(i)

(ii) Unstable objects shall not be used to support scaffolds or platform units.1926.451(c)(2)(ii) (iii)  Unstable objects shall not be used as working platforms.

1926.451(c)(2)(iii)

(iv)  Front-end loaders and similar pieces of equipment shall not be used to support scaffold platforms unless they have been specifically designed by the manufacturer for such use.

1926.451(c)(2)(iv)

67

1926 Construction Standards

(3)  Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the front edge of all platforms shall not be more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the face of the work, unless guardrail systems are erected along the front edge and/or personal fall arrest systems are used in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section to protect employees from falling.1926.451(b)(3) (i)  The maximum distance from the face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3 inches (8 cm);1926.451(b)(3)(i) (ii)  The maximum distance from the face for plastering and lathing operations shall be 18 inches (46 cm).1926.451(b)(3)(ii) (4)  Each end of a platform, unless cleated or otherwise restrained by hooks or equivalent means, shall extend over the centerline of its support at least 6 inches (15 cm).1926.451(b)(4)

1926.451(b)(6)

(7)  On scaffolds where platforms are overlapped to create a long platform, the overlap shall occur only over supports, and shall not be less than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are nailed together or otherwise restrained to prevent movement.

§1926.451

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

(v)  Fork-lifts shall not be used to support scaffold platforms unless the entire platform is attached to the fork and the fork-lift is not moved horizontally while the platform is occupied.

1926.451(c)(2)(v)

(3)  Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall be plumb and braced to prevent swaying and displacement.

1926.451(c)(3)

(d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds.1926.451(d) (1) All suspension scaffold support devices, such as outrigger beams, cornice hooks, parapet clamps, and similar devices, shall rest on surfaces capable of supporting at least 4 times the load imposed on them by the scaffold operating at the rated load of the hoist (or at least 1.5 times the load imposed on them by the scaffold at the stall capacity of the hoist, whichever is greater).1926.451(d)(1) (2) Suspension scaffold outrigger beams, when used, shall be made of structural metal or equivalent strength material, and shall be restrained to prevent movement.1926.451(d)(2) (3) The inboard ends of suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck, or they shall have their inboard ends stabilized by counterweights, except masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall not be stabilized by counterweights.

1926.451(d)(3)

(i)  Before the scaffold is used, direct connections shall be evaluated by a competent person who shall confirm, based on the evaluation, that the supporting surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to be imposed. In addition, masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold connections shall be designed by an engineer experienced in such scaffold design.

1926.451(d)(3)(i)

(ii) Counterweights shall be made of non-flowable material. Sand, gravel and similar materials that can be easily dislocated shall not be used as counterweights.1926.451(d)(3)(ii) (iii) Only those items specifically designed as counterweights shall be used to counterweight scaffold systems. Construction materials such as, but not limited to, masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall not be used as counterweights.1926.451(d)(3)(iii) (iv) Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical means to the outrigger beams to prevent accidental displacement.

1926.451(d)(3)(iv)

(v) Counterweights shall not be removed from an outrigger beam until the scaffold is disassembled.1926.451(d)(3)(v) (vi) Outrigger beams which are not stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck shall be secured by tiebacks.1926.451(d)(3)(vi) (vii)Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the suspension ropes.1926.451(d)(3)(vii) (viii)Outrigger beams shall be placed perpendicular to its bearing support (usually the face of the building or structure). However, where the employer can demonstrate that it is not possible to place an outrigger beam perpendicular to the face of the building or structure because of obstructions that cannot be moved, the outrigger beam may be placed at some other angle, provided opposing angle tiebacks are used.1926.451(d)(3)(viii) (ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound anchorage on the building or structure. Sound anchorages include structural members, but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical conduit.1926.451(d)(3)(ix) (x) Tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to the face of the building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed. Single tiebacks installed at an angle are prohibited.

1926.451(d)(3)(x)

(4) Suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be:1926.451(d)(4) (i) Provided with stop bolts or shackles at both ends;1926.451(d)(4)(i) (ii) Securely fastened together with the flanges turned out when channel iron beams are used in place of I-beams;1926.451(d)(4)(ii) (iii) Installed with all bearing supports perpendicular to the beam center line;1926.451(d)(4)(iii) (iv) Set and maintained with the web in a vertical position; and 1926.451(d)(4)(iv)

(v) When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which the rope is attached to the outrigger beam shall be placed directly over the center line of the stirrup.1926.451(d)(4)(v) (5) Suspension scaffold support devices such as cornice hooks, roof hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or similar devices shall be: 1926.451(d)(5)

(i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of equivalent strength; 1926.451(d)(5)(i)

(ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and1926.451(d)(5)(ii) (iii) Secured against movement by tiebacks installed at right angles to the face of the building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed and secured to a structurally sound

point of anchorage on the building or structure. Sound points of anchorage include structural members, but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical conduit.

1926.451(d)(5)(iii)

(iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope.

1926.451(d)(5)(iv)

(6) When winding drum hoists are used on a suspension scaffold, they shall contain not less than four wraps of the suspension rope at the lowest point of scaffold travel. When other types of hoists are used, the suspension ropes shall be long enough to allow the scaffold to be lowered to the level below without the rope end passing through the hoist, or the rope end shall be configured or provided with means to prevent the end from passing through the hoist.1926.451(d)(6) (7)  The use of repaired wire rope as suspension rope is prohibited.

1926.451(d)(7)

(8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together except through the use of eye splice thimbles connected with shackles or coverplates and bolts.1926.451(d)(8) (9) The load end of wire suspension ropes shall be equipped with proper size thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or equivalent means.1926.451(d)(9) (10)  Ropes shall be inspected for defects by a competent person prior to each workshift and after every occurrence which could affect a rope's integrity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of the following conditions exist:1926.451(d)(10) (i) Any physical damage which impairs the function and strength of the rope.1926.451(d)(10)(i) (ii) Kinks that might impair the tracking or wrapping of rope around the drum(s) or sheave(s).1926.451(d)(10)(ii) (iii) Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three broken wires in one strand in one rope lay.1926.451(d)(10)(iii) (iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening or peening causing loss of more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside wires.1926.451(d)(10)(iv) (v) Heat damage caused by a torch or any damage caused by contact with electrical wires.1926.451(d)(10)(v) (vi) Evidence that the secondary brake has been activated during an overspeed condition and has engaged the suspension rope.

1926.451(d)(10)(vi)

(11) Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not be used unless they are made by the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person.1926.451(d)(11) (12)  When wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds: 1926.451(d)(12)

(i) There shall be a minimum of 3 wire rope clips installed, with the clips a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart;1926.451(d)(12)(i) (ii) Clips shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations;1926.451(d)(12)(ii) (iii) Clips shall be retightened to the manufacturer's recommendations after the initial loading;1926.451(d)(12)(iii) (iv)  Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the manufacturer's recommendations at the start of each workshift thereafter;1926.451(d)(12)(iv) (v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of suspension for any scaffold hoist;1926.451(d)(12)(v) (vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the U-bolt shall be placed over the dead end of the rope, and the saddle shall be placed over the live end of the rope.1926.451(d)(12)(vi) (13)  Suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manual hoists shall be tested by a qualified testing laboratory.1926.451(d)(13) (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not be used on suspension scaffolds.1926.451(d)(14) (15) Gears and brakes of power-operated hoists used on suspension scaffolds shall be enclosed.1926.451(d)(15) (16)  In addition to the normal operating brake, suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manually operated hoists shall have a braking device or locking pawl which engages automatically when a hoist makes either of the following uncontrolled movements: an instantaneous change in momentum or an accelerated overspeed.1926.451(d)(16) (17)  Manually operated hoists shall require a positive crank force to descend.1926.451(d)(17) (18)  Two-point and multi-point suspension scaffolds shall be tied or otherwise secured to prevent them from swaying, as determined to be necessary based on an evaluation by a competent person.

Window cleaners' anchors shall not be used for this purpose.

1926.451(d)(18)

(19) Devices whose sole function is to provide emergency escape and rescue shall not be used as working platforms. This provision does not preclude the use of systems which are designed to function both as suspension scaffolds and emergency systems.

1926.451(d)(19)

68

Subpart L of Part 1926 — Scaffold Specifications (Non-mandatory)

Appendix A2.

Single Pole Wood Pole Scaffolds Light duty up to 20 feet high Maximum intended load (lbs/ft2)

Light duty up to 60 feet high

Medium duty up to 60 feet high

Heavy duty up to 60 feet high

25

25

50

75

Poles or uprights

2 × 4 in

4 × 4 in

4 × 4 in

4 × 6 in.

Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal)

6 feet

10 feet

8 feet

6 feet

Maximum pole spacing (transverse)

5 feet

5 feet

5 feet

5 feet

Runners

1 × 4 in

⁄4 × 9 in

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in.

1 1

Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet

2 × 4 in

2 × 4 in

2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in

2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in.

5 feet

2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in

2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in. (rough)

2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in

2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in.

6 feet

2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in

2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in.

8 feet

2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in 1 ⁄4 × 9 in

1

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in.

Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal members

7 feet

9 feet

7 feet

6 ft. 6 in.

Bracing horizontal

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 1 × 6 in. or 1

2 × 4 in.

Bracing diagonal

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

2 × 4 in.

Tie-ins

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in.

Planking

⁄4 × 4 in

3

Note: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with ⁄16 × 2 inch steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.

Independent Wood Pole Scaffolds Light duty up to 20 feet high

Light duty up to 60 feet high

Medium duty up to 60 feet high

Heavy duty up to 60 feet high

Maximum intended load

25 lbs/ft2

25 lbs/ft

2

2

50 lbs/ft

75 lbs/ft2.

Poles or uprights

2 × 4 in

4 × 4 in

4 × 4 in

4 × 4 in.

Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal)

6 feet

10 feet

8 feet

6 feet.

Maximum (transverse)

6 feet

10 feet

8 feet

8 feet.

1 ⁄4 × 9 in

1

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in.

1

Runners

1 ⁄4 × 4 in

Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet

2 × 4 in

2 × 4 in

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in. (rough).

6 feet

2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in

2 × 10 in. (rough) or 3 × 8 in

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in. (rough).

8 feet

2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in

2 × 10 in. (rough) or 3 × 8 in

2 × 10 in

10 feet

2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in

2 × 10 in. (rough) or 3 × 3 in

Planking Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal members

1 ⁄4 × 9 in

1

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in

2 × 10 in.

7 feet

7 feet

6 feet

6 feet.

2 × 4 in.

Bracing horizontal

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 1 × 6 in. or 1

Bracing diagonal

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

2 × 4 in.

Tie-ins

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in

1 × 4 in.

⁄4 × 4 in

3

Note: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with ⁄16 × 2 inch steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.

(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.

Minimum Size of Members

Light duty

Medium duty 50 lbs/ft2

Heavy duty

Maximum intended load

25 lbs/ft2

75 lbs/ft2.

Posts, runners and braces

Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe

Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe.

Bearers

Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches)

Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches)

Nominal 2 ⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).

OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 4 ft. × 10 ft.

OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 4 ft. × 7 ft. OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post or spacing of 6 ft. × 6 ft.

1926

1

OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 6 ft. × 8 ft.* Maximum runner spacing vertically

6 ft. 6 in

6 ft. 6 in

6 ft. 6 in.

*Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension.

77

Construction Standards

1

Nominal 2 ⁄2 in. (2.375 in.)

Appendix A

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

Note: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45° (± 5°).

Maximum Number of Planked Levels Maximum number of additional planked levels

Number of working levels:

Light duty

Medium duty

Heavy duty

1

16

11

6

2

11

1

0

125

3

6

0

0

125

4

1

0

0

125

(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of their prefabricated nature, no additional guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are being adopted in this Appendix. (d) Plasterers', decorators', and large area scaffolds. The guidelines for pole scaffolds or tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A (a) and (b)) may be applied. (e) Bricklayers' square scaffolds.

Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.2* *The squares shall be set not more than 8 feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaffolds.

Maximum width: 5 ft.

Maximum height: 5 ft.

Gussets: 1 × 6 in.

Braces: 1 × 8 in.

Legs: 2 × 6 in.

Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in. (f) Horse scaffolds.

Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ft.2**

**Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 feet apart for light duty loads, and not more than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads.

Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 lb/ft.2** Horizontal members or bearers: Light duty: 2 × 4 in.

Medium duty: 3 × 4 in.

Legs: 2 × 4 in.

Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 × 6 in.

Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in.

Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds.

(1) Brackets shall consist of a triangular-shaped frame made of wood with a cross-section not less than 2 inches by 3 inches, or of 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron.

(2) Bolts used to attach brackets to structures shall not be less than 5⁄8 inches in diameter.

(3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8 feet on centers.

(4) No more than two employees shall occupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the occupancy.

(5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds: Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in.

Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in.

Braces: 1 × 6 in.

Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3 ft. 6 in. (i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite sides of the vertical support. (ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches from the outside of the form support, and shall be braced and secured to prevent tipping or turning. The knee or angle brace shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from the form at an angle of approximately 45 degrees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a vertical support.

(6) Metal bracket scaffolds: Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 Uprights: 2 × 4 inch Bearers: As designed.

Braces: As designed.

(7) Wood bracket scaffolds: Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in Bearers: 2 × 6 in Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in Braces: 1 × 6 in (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guidelines or tables are given. (i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No specific guidelines or tables are given.

78

Maximum height of scaffold (in feet) 125

(j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not exceed 30 feet in height. Maximum intended load — 500 lbs between poles; applied at the center of the span. Not more than two employees shall be on a pump jack scaffold at one time between any two supports. When 2 × 4's are spliced together to make a 4 × 4 inch wood pole, they shall be spliced with "10 penny" common nails no more than 12 inches center to center, staggered uniformly from the opposite outside edges. (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum intended load — 25 lb/ft2. However, not more than two employees shall occupy any platform at any one time. Maximum span between supports shall be 8 feet. (l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than one employee shall occupy a window jack scaffold at any one time. (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). Crawling boards shall be not less than 10 inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats having a minimum 1 × 11⁄2 inch cross-sectional area. The cleats shall be equal in length to the width of the board and spaced at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches. (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds. No additional guidelines or tables are given. (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. Maximum intended load — 250 lbs. Wood seats for boatswains' chairs shall be not less than 1 inch thick if made of non-laminated wood, or 5⁄8 inches thick if made of marine quality plywood. (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.

(1) In addition to direct connections to buildings (except window cleaners' anchors) acceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway include angulated roping and static lines. Angulated roping is a system of platform suspension in which the upper wire rope sheaves or suspension points are closer to the plane of the building face than the corresponding attachment points on the platform, thus causing the platform to press against the face of the building. Static lines are separate ropes secured at their top and bottom ends closer to the plane of the building face than the outermost edge of the platform. By drawing the static line taut, the platform is drawn against the face of the building.

(2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a working load of 500 pounds, no more than two employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds with a working load of 750 pounds, no more than three employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at one time.

(3) Ladder-type platforms. The side stringer shall be of clear straight-grained spruce. The rungs shall be of straightgrained oak, ash, or hickory, at least 11⁄8 inches in diameter, with 7⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the side stringers at least 7⁄8 inch. The stringers shall be tied together with tie rods not less than 1⁄4 inch in diameter, passing through the stringers and riveted up tight against washers on both ends. The flooring strips shall be spaced not more than 5⁄8 inch apart, except at the side rails where the space may be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be constructed in accordance with the following table: Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms Length of Platform

12 feet

14 & 16 feet

18 & 20 feet.

Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes): At ends

1 ⁄4 × 2 ⁄4 in

3

3

1 ⁄4 × 2 ⁄4 in

3

3

1 ⁄4 × 3 in.

At middle

1 ⁄4 × 3 ⁄4 in

3

3

1 ⁄4 × 3 ⁄4 in

3

3

1 ⁄4 × 4 in.

1

3 3

7

Reinforcing strip (minimum)

A ⁄8 × ⁄8 inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached to the side or underside, full length.

Rungs

Rungs shall be 1 ⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at least ⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 inches to center.

1

Tie rods:

7

Subpart L of Part 1926 — Training for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms Length of Platform

12 feet

14 & 16 feet

18 & 20 feet.

Number (minimum)

3

4

4

Diameter (minimum)

1⁄4 inch

1⁄4 inch

1⁄4 inch

Flooring, minimum finished size

1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in

1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in

1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.

Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms Length of Platform

22 & 24 ft

28 & 30 ft.

Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):

3

At ends

1 ⁄4 × 3 in

At middle

1 ⁄4 × 4 ⁄4 in

3

1

1

3

1

1 ⁄4 × 3 ⁄2 in.

3

1 ⁄4 × 5 in.

7

Reinforcing strip (minimum)

A ⁄8 × ⁄8-inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached to the side or underside, full length.

Rungs

Rungs shall be 1 ⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at least ⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 inches to center. Tie rods.

1

Number (minimum)

5

Diameter (minimum) Flooring, minimum finished size

7

6.

1

1

⁄4 in

1

3

⁄4 in.

⁄2 × 2 ⁄4 in

1

3

⁄2 × 2 ⁄4 in.

Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 Beams: 4 × 6 in.

Maximum platform span: 8 ft.

Maximum beam span: 10 ft.

(1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice. The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a bowline knot or by a round turn and a half hitch.

(2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade manila rope. (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No additional guidelines or tables are being given for these scaffolds. (w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as described in the ANSI A92 series documents, as appropriate for the type of scaffold, can be used to establish stability for the purpose of §1926.452(w)(6). (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional guidelines or tables are being given for these scaffolds. (y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables are given. (z) Tank builder's scaffold.

(1) The maximum distance between brackets to which scaffolding and guardrail supports are attached shall be no more than 10 feet 6 inches.

(2) Not more than three employees shall occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold planking at any time.

(3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at the scaffold plank level between the innermost edge of the scaffold platform and the curved plate structure of the tank shell to serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner guardrail assembly where the space between the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12 inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches (30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope appropriately placed, or guardrails in accordance with §1926.451(g)(4), shall be installed in order to reduce that open space to less than 12 inches (30.48 cm).

(4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimensioned 2-inch (5.1 cm) × 12- inch (30.5 cm) Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Select Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas Fir planks shall have a fiber stress of at least 1900 lb/in2 (130,929 n/ cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of at least 1,900,000 lb/in2 (130,929,000 n/cm2), while Yellow Pine planks shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in2 (172,275 n/cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of at least 2,000,000 lb/in2 (137,820,000 n/ cm2).

(5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be supported by angle irons attached to brackets welded to the steel plates. These guardrails shall comply with §1926.451(g)(4). Guardrail supports shall be located at no greater than 10 feet 6 inch intervals.

[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR 46950, Aug. 7, 2012]

Appendix B Subpart L of Part 1926 — (Non-mandatory) Criteria for Determining the Feasibility of Providing Safe Access and Fall Protection for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers [Reserved] Appendix C Subpart L of Part 1926 — List of National Consensus Standards (Non-mandatory)

ANSI/SIA A92.2-1990 Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices ANSI/SIA A92.3-1990 Manually Propelled Elevating Aerial Platforms ANSI/SIA A92.5-1990 Boom Supported Elevating Work Platforms ANSI/SIA A92.6-1990 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms ANSI/SIA A92.7-1990 Airline Ground Support Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices ANSI/SIA A92.8-1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge Inspection and Maintenance Devices ANSI/SIA A92.9-1993 Mast-Climbing Work Platforms

Appendix D Subpart L of Part 1926 — List of Training Topics for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers (Non-mandatory)

This Appendix D is provided to serve as a guide to assist employers when evaluating the training needs of employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds.

The Agency believes that employees erecting or dismantling scaffolds should be trained in the following topics: • General Overview of Scaffolding

Subpart L of Part 1926 — Training for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers

79

1926 Construction Standards

(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type platforms shall be composed of not less than nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, connected together on the underside with cleats at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 inches from each end. A bar or other effective means shall be securely fastened to the platform at each end to prevent the platform from slipping off the hanger. The span between hangers for plank-type platforms shall not exceed 10 feet.

(5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms shall have side stringers of lumber not less than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span between hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when beam platforms are used. The flooring shall be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid flat and set into the upper edge of the stringers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced more than 1⁄2 inch apart. (q) (1)Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds and stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or tables are given for these scaffolds.

(2) Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.

Maximum intended load — 50 lb/ft2. Each outrigger beam shall be at least a standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at least 15 feet long. Such beams shall not project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the bearing point. Where the overhang exceeds 6 feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be composed of stronger beams or multiple beams. (r) Catenary scaffolds.

(1) Maximum intended load — 500 lbs.

(2) Not more than two employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at one time.

(3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall be 2,000 lbs.

(4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not more than 50 feet apart.

(5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1⁄2 inch (1.3 cm) diameter improved plow steel wire rope. (s) Float (ship) scaffolds.

(1) Maximum intended load — 750 lbs.

(2) Platforms shall be made of 3⁄4 inch plywood, equivalent in rating to American Plywood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exterior.

(3) Bearers shall be made from 2 × 4 inch, or 1 × 10 inch rough lumber. They shall be free of knots and other flaws.

(4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade manila rope. (t) Interior hung scaffolds.

Bearers (use on edge): 2 × 10 in.

Maximum intended load: Maximum span 25 lb/ft.2: 10 ft.

50 lb/ft.2: 10 ft.

75 lb/ft.2: 7 ft. (u) Needle beam scaffolds.

Appendix D2.

Appendix E

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

• regulations and standards • erection/dismantling planning • PPE and proper procedures • fall protection • materials handling • access • working platforms • foundations • guys, ties and braces • Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds • specific regulations and standards • components • parts inspection • erection/dismantling planning • guys, ties and braces • fall protection • general safety • access and platforms • erection/dismantling procedures • rolling scaffold assembly • putlogs • Tube and Clamp Scaffolds • specific regulations and standards • components • parts inspection • erection/dismantling planning • guys, ties and braces • fall protection • general safety • access and platforms • erection/dismantling procedures • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges • System Scaffolds • specific regulations and standards • components • parts inspection • erection/dismantling planning • guys, ties and braces • fall protection • general safety • access and platforms • erection/dismantling procedures • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should all receive the general overview, and, in addition, specific training for the type of supported scaffold being erected or dismantled.

Figure 1. Bracing — Tube & Coupler Scaffolds

Figure 2. Suspended Scaffold Platform Welding Precautions

Appendix E Subpart L of Part 1926 — Drawings and Illustrations (Non-mandatory)

This Appendix provides drawings of particular types of scaffolds and scaffold components, and graphic illustrations of bracing patterns and tie spacing patterns.

This Appendix is intended to provide visual guidance to assist the user in complying with the requirements of subpart L, part 1926.

HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD

80

Subpart L of Part 1926 — Drawings and Illustrations (Non-mandatory)

Appendix E2.

Figure 5. System Scaffold

MAXIMUM VERTICAL GUY, TIE OR BRACE SPACING 3’- 0” AND NARROWER BASES

TIE

Attach top guy, tie or brace where a horizontal member supports inner and outer legs and is no further down than the 4 to 1 height from top of completed scaffold

Attach intermediate guys, ties or braces repeatedly where a horizontal member supports inner and outer legs and where it is no more than 20’- 0” up from the next lower attachment location.

TIE

Attach lowest guy, tie or brace where a horizontal member supports inner and outer legs and is closest to the 4 to 1 height, whether above or below the exact height.

3’- 0” AND NARROWER MINIMUM BASE DIMENSION

Figure 6. Grade Stamps

MAXIMUM VERTICAL GUY, TIE OR BRACE SPACING WIDER THAN 3’- 0” BASES

TIE

Attach top guy, tie or brace, where a horizontal member supports inner and outer legs and is no further down than the 4 to 1 height from top of completed scaffold.

MILL 10

7 SCAFFOLD PLANK Grade stamp courtesy of Southern Pine Inspection Bureau

wc SEL STR LB

SCAF PLK

D. FIR

S. DRY

Grade stamp courtesy of West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

Figure 7. Tube And Coupler Scaffold

Attach intermediate guys, ties or braces repeatedly where a horizontal member supports inner and outer legs and where it is no more than 26’- 0” up from the next lower attachment location.

TIE

1926 Construction Standards

Attach lowest guy, tie or brace where a horizontal member supports inner and outer legs and is closest to the 4 to 1 height, whether above or below the exact height.

WIDER THAN 3’- 0” MINIMUM BASE DIMENSION

81

§1926.500

Selected 1926 Construction Standards Figure 8. Scaffolding Work Surfaces

(vi) Subpart V of this part provides requirements relating to fall protection for employees working from aerial lifts or on poles, towers, or similar structures while engaged in the construction of electric transmission or distribution lines or equipment.

1926.500(a)(2)(vi)

(vii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on stairways and ladders are provided in subpart X of this part.1926.500(a)(2)(vii) (3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the requirements for the installation, construction, and proper use of fall protection required by part 1926, except as follows:1926.500(a)(3) (i) Performance requirements for guardrail systems used on scaffolds and performance requirements for falling object protection used on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part.

1926.500(a)(3)(i)

(ii) Performance requirements for stairways, stairrail systems, and handrails are provided in subpart X of this part.1926.500(a)(3)(ii) (iii) Additional performance requirements for fall arrest and workpositioning equipment are provided in Subpart V of this part.

1926.500(a)(3)(iii)

(iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to the erection of tanks and communication and broadcast towers. 1926.500(a)(3)(iv)

Figure 9. Outrigger Scaffold

(Note: Section 1926.104 sets the criteria for body belts, lanyards and lifelines used for fall protection during tank and communication and broadcast tower erection. Paragraphs (b), (c) and (f) of §1926.107 provide definitions for the pertinent terms.)

(v) Criteria for steps, handholds, ladders, and grabrails/guardrails/ railings required by subpart CC are provided in subpart CC. Sections 1926.502(a), (c) through (e), and (i) apply to activities covered under subpart CC unless otherwise stated in subpart CC. No other paragraphs of §1926.502 apply to subpart CC. 1926.500(a)(3)(v)

[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]

§1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart

(a)  Scope and application.1926.500(a) (1)  This subpart sets forth requirements and criteria for fall protection in construction workplaces covered under 29 CFR part 1926.

Exception: The provisions of this subpart do not apply when employees are making an inspection, investigation, or assessment of workplace conditions prior to the actual start of construction work or after all construction work has been completed.

1926.500(a)(1)

(2)  Section 1926.501 sets forth those workplaces, conditions, operations, and circumstances for which fall protection shall be provided except as follows:1926.500(a)(2) (i)  Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part.

1926.500(a)(2)(i)

(ii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on cranes and derricks are provided in subpart CC of this part.

1926.500(a)(2)(ii)

(iii)  Fall protection requirements for employees performing steel erection work (except for towers and tanks) are provided in subpart R of this part.1926.500(a)(2)(iii) (iv) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on certain types of equipment used in tunneling operations are provided in subpart S of this part.1926.500(a)(2)(iv) (v) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees engaged in the erection of tanks and communication and broadcast towers are provided in §1926.105.1926.500(a)(2)(v)

82

(4) Section 1926.503 sets forth requirements for training in the installation and use of fall protection systems, except in relation to steel erection activities and the use of equipment covered by subpart CC.1926.500(a)(4) (b)  Definitions.

Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices.

Body belt (safety belt) means a strap with means both for securing it about the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device.

Body harness means straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system.

Buckle means any device for holding the body belt or body harness closed around the employee's body.

Connector means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an independent component of the system, such as a carabiner, or it may be an integral component of part of the system (such as a buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt or body harness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to a lanyard or selfretracting lanyard).

Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an area in which certain work (e.g., overhand bricklaying) may take place without the use of guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety net systems and access to the zone is controlled.

Dangerous equipment means equipment (such as pickling or galvanizing tanks, degreasing units, machinery, electrical equipment, and other units) which, as a result of form or function, may be hazardous to employees who fall onto or into such equipment.

Deceleration device means any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip- stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards, automatic self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.

Deceleration distance means the additional vertical distance a falling employee travels, excluding lifeline elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration device begins to operate. It is measured as the distance between the location of an employee's body belt or body harness attachment point at the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device during a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee comes to a full stop.

Equivalent means alternative designs, materials, or methods to protect against a hazard which the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the methods, materials or designs specified in the standard.

Subpart M of Part 1926 — Personal Fall Arrest Systems Example D: Separate, Non-Contiguous Roof Areas

Appendix CI.

Example F: Irregular, Non-Rectangular Shaped Roofs

[85 FR 8738, Feb. 18, 2020]

Appendix B Subpart M of Part 1926 — Guardrail Systems Example E: Roofs With Penthouses, Open Courtyards, Additional Floors, etc.

Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with §1926.502(b)

Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas by using dividing lines of minimum length to minimize the size and number of the areas which are potentially less than or equal to 50 feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit the size of roof areas where the safety monitoring system alone can be used [1926.50l(b)(10)].

Dotted lines are used in the examples to show the location of dividing lines.

W denotes correct and W denotes incorrect measurements of width.

The standard requires guardrail systems and components to be designed and built to meet the requirements of §1926.502 (b)(3), (4), and (5). This Appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with these requirements. An employer may use these guidelines as a starting point for designing guardrail systems. However, the guidelines do not provide all the information necessary to build a complete system, and the employer is still responsible for designing and assembling these components in such a way that the completed system will meet the requirements of §1926.502(b)(3), (4), and (5). Components for which no specific guidelines are given in this Appendix (e.g., joints, base connections, components made with other materials, and components with other dimensions) must also be designed and constructed in such a way that the completed system meets the requirements of §1926.502.

(1) For wood railings: Wood components shall be minimum 1500 lbft/in2 fiber (stress grade) construction grade lumber; the posts shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm × 10 cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm × 10 cm) lumber, the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch by 6-inch (2.5 cm × 15 cm) lumber. All lumber dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by the American Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January 1970.

(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate railings shall be at least one and one-half inches nominal diameter (schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers.

(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least 2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm × 10 cm) by 3⁄8-inch (1.1 cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers.

1926

Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With §1926.502(d) I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems (a) General. This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers comply with the requirements in §1926.502(d).

Paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this Appendix describe test procedures which may be used to determine compliance with the requirements in §1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in Appendix D of this subpart, the test methods listed here in Appendix C can also be used to assist employers comply with the requirements in §1926.502(e)(3) and (4) for positioning device systems.

89

Construction Standards

Appendix C Subpart M of Part 1926 — Personal Fall Arrest Systems

Appendix C

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

(b) General conditions for all tests in the Appendix to §1926.502(d).

(1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration devices should be attached to an anchorage and connected to the body-belt or body harness in the same manner as they would be when used to protect employees.

(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and should not have a deflection greater than 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.

(3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz. (4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).

(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance should be supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic lanyard or lifeline available to be used with the system.

(6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required level and should be quickly released without having any appreciable motion imparted to it.

(7) The system's performance should be evaluated taking into account the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be used.

(8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation. (c) Strength test.

(1) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this section.)

(2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused system should be used for each test.

(3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness.

(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the lifeline above the centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline's anchorage point should not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m).

(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, and for systems with deceleration devices which have a connection distance in excess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness), the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to its hanging location (6 feet below the anchorage). The test weight should fall without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. In some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length may need to be added to the system (for test purposes) to create the necessary free fall distance.

(6) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m).

(7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness has failed the strength test. (d) Force test (1) General. The test consists of dropping the respective test weight once as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) of this section.

A new, unused system should be used for each test.

(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix). (ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness. (iii) The test weight should fall free from the anchorage level to its hanging location (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test.

(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix) (ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the maximum fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal use conditions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (1.83 m), except as follows: [A] For deceleration systems which have a connection link or lanyard, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to the connection distance (measured between the centerline

90

of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness).

[B] For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to that permitted by the system in normal use.

(For example, to test a system with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard, the test weight should be supported and the system allowed to retract the lifeline or lanyard as it would in normal use. The test weight would then be released and the force and deceleration distance measured).

(4) A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting force exceeds 1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness.

(5) The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be recorded during the force test. (e) Deceleration device tests (1) General. The device should be evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions, (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for which the device is designed.

(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 times over the same length of line a distance of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the mechanism should lock each time. (ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline which must be used, several types (different diameters and different materials), of lifelines should be used to test the device.

(3) Other self-activating-type deceleration devices. The locking mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices designed for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they would in normal service.

II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for personal fall arrest systems. The following information constitutes additional guidelines for use in complying with requirements for a personal fall arrest system. (a) Selection and use considerations.

(1) The kind of personal fall arrest system selected should match the particular work situation, and any possible free fall distance should be kept to a minimum. Consideration should be given to the particular work environment. For example, the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold environments may also have an adverse effect on the system. Wire rope should not be used where an electrical hazard is anticipated. As required by the standard, the employer must plan to have means available to promptly rescue an employee should a fall occur, since the suspended employee may not be able to reach a work level independently.

(2) Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are subject to damage by work operations such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting, the component should be protected, or other securing systems should be used. The employer should fully evaluate the work conditions and environment (including seasonal weather changes) before selecting the appropriate personal fall protection system. Once in use, the system's effectiveness should be monitored. In some cases, a program for cleaning and maintenance of the system may be necessary. (b) Testing considerations. Before purchasing or putting into use a personal fall arrest system, an employer should obtain from the supplier information about the system based on its performance during testing so that the employer can know if the system meets this standard. Testing should be done using recognized test methods. This Appendix contains test methods recognized for evaluating the performance of fall arrest systems. Not all systems may need to be individually tested; the performance of some systems may be based on data and calculations derived from testing of similar systems, provided that enough information is available to demonstrate similarity of function and design. (c) Component compatibility considerations. Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is designed, tested, and supplied as a complete system. However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration devices, body belts and body harnesses to be interchanged since some components wear out before others. The employer and employee should realize that not all components are interchangeable. For instance, a lanyard should not be connected between a body belt (or harness) and a deceleration device of the self-retracting type since this can result in additional free fall for which the system was not designed. Any substitution or change to a personal fall arrest system should be fully evaluated or tested by a competent person to determine that it meets the standard, before the modified system is put in use. (d) Employee training considerations. Thorough employee training in the selection and use of personal fall arrest systems is imperative.

Employees must be trained in the safe use of the system. This

Subpart M of Part 1926 — Personal Fall Arrest Systems

should be replaced by a stronger one, but one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum arrest force characteristics.

(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or lifeline (at any location) can reduce the lifeline or lanyard strength by 50 percent or more.

Therefore, a stronger lanyard or lifeline should be used to compensate for the weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard length should be reduced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize free fall distance, or the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one which has an appropriately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a knot.

(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline around an "H" or "I" beam or similar support can reduce its strength as much as 70 percent due to the cutting action of the beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline should be protected from the edge; or free fall distance should be greatly minimized.

(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or around rough or sharp surfaces reduces strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging should be used. Such alternatives may include use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap around or over the problem surface.

(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an attached component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of 15 degrees, the force amplification is about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of sag, and the line's elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline and the anchorages to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a horizontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the falling employee and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall may cause other employees to fall also. Horizontal lifeline and anchorage strength should be increased for each additional employee to be tied off. For these and other reasons, the design of systems using horizontal lifelines must only be done by qualified persons. Testing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to use is recommended.

(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt and its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at an angle to this axis (in the direction of shear). Also, care should be exercised in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid accidental disengagement of snap-hooks not designed to be compatible for the connection.

(8) Due to the significant reduction in the strength of the lifeline/ lanyard (in some cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be used for lifeline/ lanyard connections except in emergency situations where no other available system is practical. The "one-and-one" sliding hitch knot should never be used because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The "two-and- two," or "three-andthree" knot (preferable) may be used in emergency situations; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distance to a minimum because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As required by the standard, each employee must have a separate lifeline [except employees engaged in constructing elevator shafts who are permitted to have two employees on one lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical.

The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the lifeline during the arrest of the fall may pull other employees' lanyards, causing them to fall as well. (j) Snap-hook considerations.

(1) Although not required by this standard for all connections until January 1, 1998, locking snaphooks designed for connection to suitable objects (of sufficient strength) are highly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a positive locking mechanism in addition to the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow the keeper to open under moderate pressure without someone first releasing the mechanism. Such a feature, properly designed, effectively prevents roll-out from occurring.

(2) As required by §1926.502(d)(6), the following connections must be avoided (unless properly designed locking snaphooks are used) because they are conditions which can result in roll-out when a nonlocking snaphook is used: (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a horizontal lifeline. (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to one dee-ring.

91

1926 Construction Standards

should include the following: application limits; proper anchoring and tie-off techniques; estimation of free fall distance, including determination of deceleration distance, and total fall distance to prevent striking a lower level; methods of use; and inspection and storage of the system. Careless or improper use of the equipment can result in serious injury or death. Employers and employees should become familiar with the material in this Appendix, as well as manufacturer's recommendations, before a system is used. Of uppermost importance is the reduction in strength caused by certain tieoffs (such as using knots, tying around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed are the importance of inspections prior to use, the limitations of the equipment, and unique conditions at the worksite which may be important in determining the type of system to use. (e) Instruction considerations. Employers should obtain comprehensive instructions from the supplier as to the system's proper use and application, including, where applicable: (1) The force measured during the sample force test; (2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards during the force test; (3) The deceleration distance measured for deceleration devices during the force test; (4) Caution statements on critical use limitations; (5) Application limits; (6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, including the proper dee-ring or other attachment point to use on the body belt and harness for fall arrest; (7) Proper climbing techniques; (8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage; and (9) Specific lifelines which may be used. This information should be provided to employees during training. (f) Rescue considerations. As required by §1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest systems are used, the employer must assure that employees can be promptly rescued or can rescue themselves should a fall occur. The availability of rescue personnel, ladders or other rescue equipment should be evaluated. In some situations, equipment which allows employees to rescue themselves after the fall has been arrested may be desirable, such as devices which have descent capability. (g) Inspection considerations. As required by §1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems must be regularly inspected. Any component with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; alterations or additions which might affect its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non- functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed. (h) Tie-off considerations.

(1) One of the most important aspects of personal fall protection systems is fully planning the system before it is put into use.

Probably the most overlooked component is planning for suitable anchorage points. Such planning should ideally be done before the structure or building is constructed so that anchorage points can be incorporated during construction for use later for window cleaning or other building maintenance. If properly planned, these anchorage points may be used during construction, as well as afterwards. (i) Properly planned anchorages should be used if they are available. In some cases, anchorages must be installed immediately prior to use. In such cases, a registered professional engineer with experience in designing fall protection systems, or another qualified person with appropriate education and experience should design an anchor point to be installed. (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes that there will be a need to devise an anchor point from existing structures.

Examples of what might be appropriate anchor points are steel members or I-beams if an acceptable strap is available for the connection (do not use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto itself); large eye-bolts made of an appropriate grade steel; guardrails or railings if they have been designed for use as an anchor point; or masonry or wood members only if the attachment point is substantial and precautions have been taken to assure that bolts or other connectors will not pull through. A qualified person should be used to evaluate the suitable of these "make shift" anchorages with a focus on proper strength.

(2) Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchoring system which does not reduce the strength of the system (such as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/ snap-hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will reduce the strength of the system, that component

Appendix CII.

Appendix D

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

(iii)Two snaphooks connected to each other. (iv)A snaphook connected back on its integral lanyard. (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing loop or webbing lanyard. (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, rebar, or other connection point in relation to the snaphook dimensions which would allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed by a turning motion of the snaphook. (k) Free fall considerations. The employer and employee should at all times be aware that a system's maximum arresting force is evaluated under normal use conditions established by the manufacturer, and in no case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can significantly increase the arresting force on the employee, possibly to the point of causing injury. Because of this, the free fall distance should be kept at a minimum, and, as required by the standard, in no case greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or anchor should be located at or above the connection point of the fall arrest equipment to belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional free fall distance is added to the length of the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attaching to the working surface will often result in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used, the total free fall distance will be the distance from the working level to the body belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length.

Another important consideration is that the arresting force which the fall system must withstand also goes up with greater distances of free fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the system. (l) Elongation and deceleration distance considerations. Other factors involved in a proper tie-off are elongation and deceleration distance. During the arresting of a fall, a lanyard will experience a length of stretching or elongation, whereas activation of a deceleration device will result in a certain stopping distance.

These distances should be available with the lanyard or device's instructions and must be added to the free fall distance to arrive at the total fall distance before an employee is fully stopped. The additional stopping distance may be very significant if the lanyard or deceleration device is attached near or at the end of a long lifeline, which may itself add considerable distance due to its own elongation. As required by the standard, sufficient distance to allow for all of these factors must also be maintained between the employee and obstructions below, to prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should be allowed below the securing point of a rope grab type deceleration device, and the end terminated to prevent the device from sliding off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline should extend to the ground or the next working level below.

These measures are suggested to prevent the worker from inadvertently moving past the end of the lifeline and having the rope grab become disengaged from the lifeline. (m) Obstruction considerations. The location of the tie-off should also consider the hazard of obstructions in the potential fall path of the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the possibilities of exaggerated swinging should be considered. In addition, when a body belt is used, the employee's body will go through a horizontal position to a jack- knifed position during the arrest of all falls. Thus, obstructions which might interfere with this motion should be avoided or a severe injury could occur. (n) Other considerations. Because of the design of some personal fall arrest systems, additional considerations may be required for proper tie-off. For example, heavy deceleration devices of the self- retracting type should be secured overhead in order to avoid the weight of the device having to be supported by the employee. Also, if self- retracting equipment is connected to a horizontal lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be minimized to prevent the device from sliding down the lifeline to a position which creates a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all cases, manufacturer's instructions should be followed.

Appendix D Subpart M of Part 1926 — Positioning Device Systems Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With §1926.502(e) I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device Systems. This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers comply with the requirements for positioning device systems in §1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of Appendix C of subpart M relating to §1926.502(d) — Personal Fall Arrest Systems — set forth test procedures which may be used, along with the procedures listed below, to determine compliance with the

92

requirements for positioning device systems in §1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M. (a) General.

(1) Single strap positioning devices shall have one end attached to a fixed anchorage and the other end connected to a body belt or harness in the same manner as they would be used to protect employees. Double strap positioning devices, similar to window cleaner's belts, shall have one end of the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and the other end shall hang free. The body belt or harness shall be attached to the strap in the same manner as it would be used to protect employees. The two strap ends shall be adjusted to their maximum span.

(2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and shall not have a deflection greater than .04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.

(3) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. The weight shall be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).

(4) Each test shall consist of dropping the specified weight one time without failure of the system being tested. A new system shall be used for each test.

(5) The test weight for each test shall be hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its "at rest" position), and shall be dropped so as to permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m).

(6) The test is failed whenever any breakage or slippage occurs which permits the weight to fall free of the system.

(7) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation; however, all such incapacities shall be readily apparent.

II. Inspection Considerations. As required in §1926.502(e)(5), positioning device systems must be regularly inspected. Any component with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; alterations or additions which might affect its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non- functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed.

Appendix E Subpart M of Part 1926 — Sample Fall Protection Plan Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With §1926.502(k) Employers engaged in leading edge work, precast concrete construction work and residential construction work who can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use conventional fall protection systems must develop and follow a fall protection plan. Below are sample fall protection plans developed for precast concrete construction and residential work that could be tailored to be site specific for other precast concrete or residential jobsite. This sample plan can be modified to be used for other work involving leading edge work. The sample plan outlines the elements that must be addressed in any fall protection plan. The reasons outlined in this sample fall protection plan are for illustrative purposes only and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable rationale (unless the conditions at the job site are the same as those covered by these sample plans) for not using conventional fall protection systems for a particular precast concrete or residential construction worksite. However, the sample plans provide guidance to employers on the type of information that is required to be discussed in fall protection plans.

Sample Fall Protection Plans Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress Concrete Structures This Fall Protection Plan is specific for the following project: Location of Job__________________________________________ Erecting Company________________________________________ Date Plan Prepared or Modified_____________________________ Plan Prepared By________________________________________ Plan Approved By________________________________________ Plan Supervised By_______________________________________ The following Fall Protection Plan is a sample program prepared for the prevention of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Protection Plan must be developed and evaluated on a site by site basis. It is recommended that erectors discuss the written Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area Office prior to going on a jobsite.

I. Statement of Company Policy (Company Name) is dedicated to the protection of its employees from on-the-job injuries. All employees of (Company Name) have the responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of this plan is:

Beams and columns and install the shear connectors after the metal decking has been installed, using the metal decking as a working platform. Shear connectors shall not be installed from within a controlled decking zone (CDZ), as specified in §1926.760(c)(7).1926.754(c)(2) (d) Plumbing-up.1926.754(d) (1) When deemed necessary by a competent person, plumbing-up equipment shall be installed in conjunction with the steel erection process to ensure the stability of the structure.1926.754(d)(1) (2) When used, plumbing-up equipment shall be in place and properly installed before the structure is loaded with construction material such as loads of joists, bundles of decking or bundles of bridging.

1926.754(d)(2)

(3) Plumbing-up equipment shall be removed only with the approval of a competent person.1926.754(d)(3) (e) Metal decking — 1926.754(e) (1) Hoisting, landing and placing of metal decking bundles.

1926.754(e)(1)

(i) Bundle packaging and strapping shall not be used for hoisting unless specifically designed for that purpose.1926.754(e)(1)(i) (ii) If loose items such as dunnage, flashing, or other materials are placed on the top of metal decking bundles to be hoisted, such items shall be secured to the bundles.1926.754(e)(1)(ii) (iii) Bundles of metal decking on joists shall be landed in accordance with §1926.757(e)(4).1926.754(e)(1)(iii) (iv) Metal decking bundles shall be landed on framing members so that enough support is provided to allow the bundles to be unbanded without dislodging the bundles from the supports.

1926.754(e)(1)(iv)

(v) At the end of the shift or when environmental or jobsite conditions require, metal decking shall be secured against displacement.1926.754(e)(1)(v) (2) Roof and floor holes and openings. Metal decking at roof and floor holes and openings shall be installed as follows:1926.754(e)(2) (i) Framed metal deck openings shall have structural members turned down to allow continuous deck installation except where not allowed by structural design constraints or constructibility.

1926.754(e)(2)(i)

(ii) Roof and floor holes and openings shall be decked over. Where large size, configuration or other structural design does not allow openings to be decked over (such as elevator shafts, stair wells, etc.) employees shall be protected in accordance with §1926.760(a)(1).1926.754(e)(2)(ii) (iii) Metal decking holes and openings shall not be cut until immediately prior to being permanently filled with the equipment or structure needed or intended to fulfill its specific use and which meets the strength requirements of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, or shall be immediately covered.1926.754(e)(2)(iii) (3) Covering roof and floor openings.1926.754(e)(3) (i)  Covers for roof and floor openings shall be capable of supporting, without failure, twice the weight of the employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time.1926.754(e)(3)(i) (ii) All covers shall be secured when installed to prevent accidental displacement by the wind, equipment or employees.

1926.754(e)(3)(ii)

(ii) Temporary loads placed on a derrick floor shall be distributed over the underlying support members so as to prevent local overloading of the deck material.1926.754(e)(6)(ii)

§1926.755 Column anchorage

(a) General requirements for erection stability.1926.755(a) (1)  All columns shall be anchored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods (anchor bolts).1926.755(a)(1) (2)  Each column anchor rod (anchor bolt) assembly, including the column-to-base plate weld and the column foundation, shall be designed to resist a minimum eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46m) from the extreme outer face of the column in each direction at the top of the column shaft.

1926.755(a)(2)

(3) Columns shall be set on level finished floors, pre-grouted leveling plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs which are adequate to transfer the construction loads.1926.755(a)(3) (4) All columns shall be evaluated by a competent person to determine whether guying or bracing is needed; if guying or bracing is needed, it shall be installed.1926.755(a)(4) (b)  Repair, replacement or field modification of anchor rods (anchor bolts).1926.755(b) (1) Anchor rods (anchor bolts) shall not be repaired, replaced or fieldmodified without the approval of the project structural engineer of record.1926.755(b)(1) (2)  Prior to the erection of a column, the controlling contractor shall provide written notification to the steel erector if there has been any repair, replacement or modification of the anchor rods (anchor bolts) of that column.1926.755(b)(2)

§1926.756 Beams and columns

(a) General.1926.756(a) (1)  During the final placing of solid web structural members, the load shall not be released from the hoisting line until the members are secured with at least two bolts per connection, of the same size and strength as shown in the erection drawings, drawn up wrench- tight or the equivalent as specified by the project structural engineer of record, except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.1926.756(a)(1) (2) A competent person shall determine if more than two bolts are necessary to ensure the stability of cantilevered members; if additional bolts are needed, they shall be installed.1926.756(a)(2) (b) Diagonal bracing. Solid web structural members used as diagonal bracing shall be secured by at least one bolt per connection drawn up wrench-tight or the equivalent as specified by the project structural engineer of record. 1926.756(b) (c)  (1)  Double connections at columns and/or at beam webs over a column. When two structural members on opposite sides of a column web, or a beam web over a column, are connected sharing common connection holes, at least one bolt with its wrenchtight nut shall remain connected to the first member unless a shopattached or field-attached seat or equivalent connection device is supplied with the member to secure the first member and prevent the column from being displaced (See Appendix H to this subpart for examples of equivalent connection devices).1926.756(c)(1) (2) If a seat or equivalent device is used, the seat (or device) shall be designed to support the load during the double connection process. It shall be adequately bolted or welded to both a supporting member and the first member before the nuts on the shared bolts are removed to make the double connection.1926.756(c)(2) (d) Column splices. Each column splice shall be designed to resist a minimum eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46 m) from the extreme outer face of the column in each direction at the top of the column shaft. 1926.756(d) (e)  Perimeter columns. Perimeter columns shall not be erected unless: 1926.756(e) (1)  The perimeter columns extend a minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m) above the finished floor to permit installation of perimeter safety cables prior to erection of the next tier, except where constructibility does not allow (see Appendix F to this subpart);1926.756(e)(1) (2) The perimeter columns have holes or other devices in or attached to perimeter columns at 42-45 inches (107-114 cm) above the finished floor and the midpoint between the finished floor and the top cable to permit installation of perimeter safety cables required by §1926.760(a)(2), except where constructibility does not allow.

(See Appendix F to this subpart).1926.756(e)(2)

105

1926 Construction Standards

(iii) All covers shall be painted with high-visibility paint or shall be marked with the word "HOLE" or "COVER" to provide warning of the hazard.1926.754(e)(3)(iii) (iv)  Smoke dome or skylight fixtures that have been installed, are not considered covers for the purpose of this section unless they meet the strength requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section.1926.754(e)(3)(iv) (4) Decking gaps around columns. Wire mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent, shall be installed around columns where planks or metal decking do not fit tightly. The materials used must be of sufficient strength to provide fall protection for personnel and prevent objects from falling through.1926.754(e)(4) (5) Installation of metal decking.1926.754(e)(5) (i) Except as provided in §1926.760(c), metal decking shall be laid tightly and immediately secured upon placement to prevent accidental movement or displacement.1926.754(e)(5)(i) (ii) During initial placement, metal decking panels shall be placed to ensure full support by structural members.1926.754(e)(5)(ii) (6) Derrick floors.1926.754(e)(6) (i) A derrick floor shall be fully decked and/or planked and the steel member connections completed to support the intended floor loading.1926.754(e)(6)(i)

§1926.756(e)

§1926.757

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

§1926.757 Open web steel joists

(a) General.1926.757(a) (1)  Except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, where steel joists are used and columns are not framed in at least two directions with solid web structural steel members, a steel joist shall be field-bolted at the column to provide lateral stability to the column during erection. For the installation of this joist:1926.757(a)(1) (i) A vertical stabilizer plate shall be provided on each column for steel joists. The plate shall be a minimum of 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm) and shall extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) below the bottom chord of the joist with a 13⁄16 inch (21 mm) hole to provide an attachment point for guying or plumbing cables.1926.757(a)(1)(i) (ii) The bottom chords of steel joists at columns shall be stabilized to prevent rotation during erection.1926.757(a)(1)(ii) (iii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end of the steel joist is field-bolted, and each end of the bottom chord is restrained by the column stabilizer plate.1926.757(a)(1)(iii) (2) Where constructibility does not allow a steel joist to be installed at the column:1926.757(a)(2) (i) an alternate means of stabilizing joists shall be installed on both sides near the column and shall:1926.757(a)(2)(i) [A] provide stability equivalent to paragraph (a)(1) of this section;1926.757(a)(2)(i)[A] [B] be designed by a qualified person;1926.757(a)(2)(i)[B] [C] be shop installed; and1926.757(a)(2)(i)[C] [D] be included in the erection drawings.1926.757(a)(2)(i)[D] (ii) hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end of the steel joist is field-bolted and the joist is stabilized.

1926.757(a)(2)(ii)

(3) Where steel joists at or near columns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the joist shall be designed with sufficient strength to allow one employee to release the hoisting cable without the need for erection bridging.1926.757(a)(3) (4)  Where steel joists at or near columns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), the joists shall be set in tandem with all bridging installed unless an alternative method of erection, which provides equivalent stability to the steel joist, is designed by a qualified person and is included in the site-specific erection plan.1926.757(a)(4) (5) A steel joist or steel joist girder shall not be placed on any support structure unless such structure is stabilized.1926.757(a)(5) (6) When steel joist(s) are landed on a structure, they shall be secured to prevent unintentional displacement prior to installation.

1926.757(a)(6)

(7) No modification that affects the strength of a steel joist or steel joist girder shall be made without the approval of the project structural engineer of record.1926.757(a)(7) (8)  Field-bolted joists.1926.757(a)(8) (i)  Except for steel joists that have been pre-assembled into panels, connections of individual steel joists to steel structures in bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more shall be fabricated to allow for field bolting during erection.1926.757(a)(8)(i) (ii)  These connections shall be field-bolted unless constructibility does not allow.1926.757(a)(8)(ii) (9)  Steel joists and steel joist girders shall not be used as anchorage points for a fall arrest system unless written approval to do so is obtained from a qualified person.1926.757(a)(9) (10) A bridging terminus point shall be established before bridging is installed. (See Appendix C to this subpart.)1926.757(a)(10) (b)  Attachment of steel joists and steel joist girders.1926.757(b) (1)  Each end of "K" series steel joists shall be attached to the support structure with a minimum of two 1⁄8-inch (3 mm) fillet welds 1 inch (25 mm) long or with two 1⁄2-inch (13 mm) bolts, or the equivalent.1926.757(b)(1) (2)  Each end of "LH" and "DLH" series steel joists and steel joist girders shall be attached to the support structure with a minimum of two 1⁄4-inch (6 mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long, or with two 3⁄4-inch (19 mm) bolts, or the equivalent.1926.757(b)(2) (3)  Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist shall be attached to the support structure, at least at one end on both sides of the seat, immediately upon placement in the final erection position and before additional joists are placed.

1926.757(b)(3)

(4) Panels that have been pre-assembled from steel joists with bridging shall be attached to the structure at each corner before the hoisting cables are released.1926.757(b)(4) (c) Erection of steel joists.1926.757(c) (1)  Both sides of the seat of one end of each steel joist that requires bridging under Tables A and B shall be attached to the support structure before hoisting cables are released.1926.757(c)(1)

106

(2)  For joists over 60 feet, both ends of the joist shall be attached as specified in paragraph (b) of this section and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section met before the hoisting cables are released.1926.757(c)(2) (3)  On steel joists that do not require erection bridging under Tables A and B, only one employee shall be allowed on the joist until all bridging is installed and anchored.1926.757(c)(3)

Table A — Erection Bridging for Short Span Joists Joist

Span

8L1

NM

10K1

NM

12K1

23-0

12K3

NM

12K5

NM

14K1

27-0

14K3

NM

14K4

NM

14K6

NM

16K2

29-0

16K3

30-0

16K4

32-0

16K5

32-0

16K6

NM

16K7

NM

16K9

NM

18K3

31-0

18K4

32-0

18K5

33-0

18K6

35-0

18K7

NM

18K9

NM

18K10

NM

20K3

32-0

20K4

34-0

20K5

34-0

20K6

36-0

20K7

39-0

20K9

39-0

20K10

NM

22K4

34-0

22K5

35-0

22K6

36-0

22K7

40-0

22K9

40-0

22K10

40-0

22K11

40-0

24K4

36-0

24K5

38-0

24K6

39-0

24K7

43-0

24K8

43-0

24K9

44-0

24K10

NM

24K12

NM

26K5

38-0

26K6

39-0

26K7

43-0

26K8

44-0

26K9

45-0

26K10

49-0

26K12

NM

28K6

40-0

Open web steel joists Table A — Erection Bridging for Short Span Joists

§1926.757(c)

Table B — Erection Bridging for Long Span Joists Span

Joist

Span

28K7

43-0

18LH05

NM.

28K8

44-0

18LH06

NM.

28K9

45-0

18LH07

NM.

28K10

49-0

18LH08

NM.

28K12

53-0

18LH09

NM.

30K7

44-0

20LH02

33-0.

30K8

45-0

20LH03

38-0.

30K9

45-0

20LH04

NM.

30K10

50-0

20LH05

NM.

30K11

52-0

20LH06

NM.

30K12

54-0

20LH07

NM.

10KCS1

NM

20LH08

NM.

10KCS2

NM

20LH09

NM.

10KCS3

NM

20LH10

NM.

12KCS1

NM

24LH03

35-0.

12KCS2

NM

24LH04

39-0.

12KCS3

NM

24LH05

40-0.

14KCS1

NM

24LH06

45-0.

14KCS2

NM

24LH07

NM.

14KCS3

NM

24LH08

NM.

16KCS2

NM

24LH09

NM.

16KCS3

NM

24LH10

NM.

16KCS4

NM

24LH11

NM.

16KCS5

NM

28LH05

42-0.

18KCS2

35-0

28LH06

42-0.

18KCS3

NM

28LH07

NM.

18KCS4

NM

28LH08

NM.

18KCS5

NM

28LH09

NM.

20KCS2

36-0

28LH10

NM.

20KCS3

39-0

28LH11

NM.

20KCS4

NM

28LH12

NM.

20KCS5

NM

28LH13

NM.

22KCS2

36-0

32LH06

47-0 through 60-0.

22KCS3

40-0

32LH07

47-0 through 60-0.

22KCS4

NM

32LH08

55-0 through 60-0.

22KCS5

NM

32LH09

NM through 60-0.

24KCS2

39-0

32LH10

NM through 60-0.

24KCS3

44-0

32LH11

NM through 60-0.

24KCS4

NM

32LH12

NM through 60-0.

24KCS5

NM

32LH13

NM through 60-0.

26KCS2

39-0

32LH14

NM through 60-0.

26KCS3

44-0

32LH15

NM through 60-0.

26KCS4

NM

36LH07

47-0 through 60-0.

26KCS5

NM

36LH08

47-0 through 60-0.

28KCS2

40-0

36LH09

57-0 through 60-0.

28KCS3

45-0

36LH10

NM through 60-0.

28KCS4

53-0

36LH11

NM through 60-0.

28KCS5

53-0

36LH12

NM through 60-0.

30KC53

45-0

36LH13

NM through 60-0.

30KCS4

54-0

36LH14

NM through 60-0.

30KCS5

54-0

36LH15

NM through 60-0.

NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory.

1926

NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory.

Table B — Erection Bridging for Long Span Joists Joist

Span

18LH02

33-0.

18LH03

NM.

18LH04

NM.

(4) Employees shall not be allowed on steel joists where the span of the steel joist is equal to or greater than the span shown in Tables A and B except in accordance with §1926.757(d).1926.757(c)(4) (5) When permanent bridging terminus points cannot be used during erection, additional temporary bridging terminus points are required to provide stability. (See appendix C of this subpart.)

1926.757(c)(5)

107

Construction Standards

Joist

§1926.758

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

(d) Erection bridging.1926.757(d) (1) Where the span of the steel joist is equal to or greater than the span shown in Tables A and B, the following shall apply: 1926.757(d)(1)

(i) A row of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be installed near the midspan of the steel joist;1926.757(d)(1)(i) (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until this bolted diagonal erection bridging is installed and anchored; and1926.757(d)(1)(ii) (iii) No more than one employee shall be allowed on these spans until all other bridging is installed and anchored.1926.757(d)(1)(iii) (2) Where the span of the steel joist is over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet (30.5 m), the following shall apply:1926.757(d)(2) (i) All rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging; 1926.757(d)(2)(i)

(ii) Two rows of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be installed near the third points of the steel joist;1926.757(d)(2)(ii) (iii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until this bolted diagonal erection bridging is installed and anchored; and1926.757(d)(2)(iii) (iv) No more than two employees shall be allowed on these spans until all other bridging is installed and anchored.1926.757(d)(2)(iv) (3) Where the span of the steel joist is over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet (43.9 m), the following shall apply:1926.757(d)(3) (i) All rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging; 1926.757(d)(3)(i)

(ii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until all bridging is installed and anchored; and1926.757(d)(3)(ii) (iii) No more than two employees shall be allowed on these spans until all bridging is installed and anchored.1926.757(d)(3)(iii) (4) For steel members spanning over 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods used shall be in accordance with §1926.756.1926.757(d)(4) (5) Where any steel joist specified in paragraphs (c)(2) and (d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(3) of this section is a bottom chord bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal bridging shall be provided near the support(s). This bridging shall be installed and anchored before the hoisting cable(s) is released.1926.757(d)(5) (6) When bolted diagonal erection bridging is required by this section, the following shall apply:1926.757(d)(6) (i) The bridging shall be indicated on the erection drawing; 1926.757(d)(6)(i)

(ii) The erection drawing shall be the exclusive indicator of the proper placement of this bridging;1926.757(d)(6)(ii) (iii) Shop-installed bridging clips, or functional equivalents, shall be used where the bridging bolts to the steel joists;1926.757(d)(6)(iii) (iv) When two pieces of bridging are attached to the steel joist by a common bolt, the nut that secures the first piece of bridging shall not be removed from the bolt for the attachment of the second; and1926.757(d)(6)(iv) (v) Bridging attachments shall not protrude above the top chord of the steel joist.1926.757(d)(6)(v) (e) Landing and placing loads.1926.757(e) (1) During the construction period, the employer placing a load on steel joists shall ensure that the load is distributed so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of any steel joist.1926.757(e)(1) (2) Except for paragraph (e)(4) of this section, no construction loads are allowed on the steel joists until all bridging is installed and anchored and all joist-bearing ends are attached.1926.757(e)(2) (3) The weight of a bundle of joist bridging shall not exceed a total of 1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist bridging shall be placed on a minimum of three steel joists that are secured at one end.

The edge of the bridging bundle shall be positioned within 1 foot (.30 m) of the secured end.1926.757(e)(3) (4)  No bundle of decking may be placed on steel joists until all bridging has been installed and anchored and all joist bearing ends attached, unless all of the following conditions are met: 1926.757(e)(4)

(i) The employer has first determined from a qualified person and documented in a site-specific erection plan that the structure or portion of the structure is capable of supporting the load; 1926.757(e)(4)(i)

(ii) The bundle of decking is placed on a minimum of three steel joists;1926.757(e)(4)(ii) (iii) The joists supporting the bundle of decking are attached at both ends;1926.757(e)(4)(iii) (iv) At least one row of bridging is installed and anchored; 1926.757(e)(4)(iv)

(v) The total weight of the bundle of decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds (1816 kg); and1926.757(e)(4)(v) (vi) Placement of the bundle of decking shall be in accordance with paragraph (e)(5) of this section.1926.757(e)(4)(vi) (5) The edge of the construction load shall be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of the bearing surface of the joist end.1926.757(e)(5)

108

§1926.758 Systems-engineered metal buildings

(a) All of the requirements of this subpart apply to the erection of systems-engineered metal buildings except §§1926.755 (column anchorage) and 1926.757 (open web steel joists). 1926.758(a) (b) Each structural column shall be anchored by a minimum of four anchor rods (anchor bolts). 1926.758(b) (c) Rigid frames shall have 50 percent of their bolts or the number of bolts specified by the manufacturer (whichever is greater) installed and tightened on both sides of the web adjacent to each flange before the hoisting equipment is released. 1926.758(c) (d)  Construction loads shall not be placed on any structural steel framework unless such framework is safely bolted, welded or otherwise adequately secured. 1926.758(d) (e) In girt and eave strut-to-frame connections, when girts or eave struts share common connection holes, at least one bolt with its wrench- tight nut shall remain connected to the first member unless a manufacturer-supplied, field-attached seat or similar connection device is present to secure the first member so that the girt or eave strut is always secured against displacement.

1926.758(e)

(f)  Both ends of all steel joists or cold-formed joists shall be fully bolted and/or welded to the support structure before: 1926.758(f) (1)  Releasing the hoisting cables;1926.758(f)(1) (2)  Allowing an employee on the joists; or1926.758(f)(2) (3)  Allowing any construction loads on the joists.1926.758(f)(3) (g)  Purlins and girts shall not be used as an anchorage point for a fall arrest system unless written approval is obtained from a qualified person. 1926.758(g) (h)  Purlins may only be used as a walking/working surface when installing safety systems, after all permanent bridging has been installed and fall protection is provided. 1926.758(h) (i)  Construction loads may be placed only within a zone that is within 8 feet (2.5 m) of the center-line of the primary support member. 1926.758(i)

§1926.759 Falling object protection

(a) Securing loose items aloft. All materials, equipment, and tools, which are not in use while aloft, shall be secured against accidental displacement. 1926.759(a) (b)  Protection from falling objects other than materials being hoisted. The controlling contractor shall bar other construction processes below steel erection unless overhead protection for the employees below is provided. 1926.759(b)

§1926.760 Fall protection

(a)  General requirements.1926.760(a) (1)  Except as provided by paragraph (a)(3) of this section, each employee engaged in a steel erection activity who is on a walking/ working surface with an unprotected side or edge more than 15 feet (4.6 m) above a lower level shall be protected from fall hazards by guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems or fall restraint systems.

1926.760(a)(1)

(2)  Perimeter safety cables. On multi-story structures, perimeter safety cables shall be installed at the final interior and exterior perimeters of the floors as soon as the metal decking has been installed.1926.760(a)(2) (3)  Connectors and employees working in controlled decking zones shall be protected from fall hazards as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, respectively.1926.760(a)(3) (b)  Connectors. Each connector shall: 1926.760(b) (1)  Be protected in accordance with paragraph (a)(1) of this section from fall hazards of more than two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level, whichever is less;1926.760(b)(1) (2) Have completed connector training in accordance with §1926.761; and1926.760(b)(2) (3)  Be provided, at heights over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower level, with a personal fall arrest system, positioning device system or fall restraint system and wear the equipment necessary to be able to be tied off; or be provided with other means of protection from fall hazards in accordance with paragraph (a)(1) of this section.1926.760(b)(3) (c)  Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ). A controlled decking zone may be established in that area of the structure over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower level where metal decking is initially being installed and forms the leading edge of a work area. In each CDZ, the following shall apply: 1926.760(c) (1) Each employee working at the leading edge in a CDZ shall be protected from fall hazards of more than two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is less.1926.760(c)(1) (2) Access to a CDZ shall be limited to only those employees engaged in leading edge work.1926.760(c)(2)

Subpart R of Part 1926 — Illustrations of Bridging Terminus Points: Non-man(3)  The boundaries of a CDZ shall be designated and clearly marked. The CDZ shall not be more than 90 feet (27.4 m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from any leading edge. The CDZ shall be marked by the use of control lines or the equivalent. Examples of acceptable procedures for demarcating CDZ's can be found in Appendix D to this subpart.1926.760(c)(3) (4) Each employee working in a CDZ shall have completed CDZ training in accordance with §1926.761.1926.760(c)(4) (5)  Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m2).1926.760(c)(5) (6) Safety deck attachments shall be performed in the CDZ from the leading edge back to the control line and shall have at least two attachments for each metal decking panel.1926.760(c)(6) (7) Final deck attachments and installation of shear connectors shall not be performed in the CDZ.1926.760(c)(7) (d)  Criteria for fall protection equipment.1926.760(d) (1)  Guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems and their components shall conform to the criteria in §1926.502 (see Appendix G to this subpart).

1926.760(d)(1)

(2)  Fall arrest system components shall be used in fall restraint systems and shall conform to the criteria in §1926.502 (see Appendix G). Either body belts or body harnesses shall be used in fall restraint systems.1926.760(d)(2) (3)  Perimeter safety cables shall meet the criteria for guardrail systems in §1926.502 (see Appendix G).1926.760(d)(3) (e)  Custody of fall protection. Fall protection provided by the steel erector shall remain in the area where steel erection activity has been completed, to be used by other trades, only if the controlling contractor or its authorized representative: 1926.760(e) (1) Has directed the steel erector to leave the fall protection in place; and1926.760(e)(1) (2) Has inspected and accepted control and responsibility of the fall protection prior to authorizing persons other than steel erectors to work in the area.1926.760(e)(2)

§1926.761 Training

The following provisions supplement the requirements of §1926.21 regarding the hazards addressed in this subpart. (a) Training personnel. Training required by this section shall be provided by a qualified person(s). 1926.761(a) (b) Fall hazard training. The employer shall train each employee exposed to a fall hazard in accordance with the requirements of this section. The employer shall institute a training program and ensure employee participation in the program. The program shall include training and instruction in the following areas: 1926.761(b) (1) The recognition and identification of fall hazards in the work area; 1926.761(b)(1)

(2) The use and operation of guardrail systems (including perimeter safety cable systems), personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems, fall restraint systems, safety net systems, and other protection to be used;1926.761(b)(2) (3) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall protection systems to be used;1926.761(b)(3) (4) The procedures to be followed to prevent falls to lower levels and through or into holes and openings in walking/working surfaces and walls; and1926.761(b)(4) (5) The fall protection requirements of this subpart.1926.761(b)(5) (c) Special training programs. In addition to the training required in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the employer shall provide special training to employees engaged in the following activities.

1926.761(c)

(1) Multiple lift rigging procedure. The employer shall ensure that each employee who performs multiple lift rigging has been provided training in the following areas:1926.761(c)(1) (i) The nature of the hazards associated with multiple lifts; and 1926.761(c)(1)(i)

1926.761(c)(2)

(i) The nature of the hazards associated with connecting; and 1926.761(c)(2)(i)

(ii) The establishment, access, proper connecting techniques and work practices required by §1926.756(c) and §1926.760(b).

1926.761(c)(2)(ii)

(3) Controlled Decking Zone Procedures. Where CDZs are being used, the employer shall assure that each employee has been provided training in the following areas:1926.761(c)(3) (i) The nature of the hazards associated with work within a controlled decking zone; and1926.761(c)(3)(i) (ii) The establishment, access, proper installation techniques and work practices required by §1926.760(c) and §1926.754(e).

1926.761(c)(3)(ii)

Appendix A to Subpart R of Part 1926 — Guidelines for Establishing the Components of a Sitespecific Erection Plan: Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With §1926.752(e)

(a) General. This appendix serves as a guideline to assist employers who elect to develop a site-specific erection plan in accordance with §1926.752(e) with alternate means and methods to provide employee protection in accordance with §1926.752(e), §1926.753(c)(5), §1926.757(a)(4) and §1926.757(e)(4). (b) Development of a site-specific erection plan.

Pre-construction conference(s) and site inspection(s) are held between the erector and the controlling contractor, and others such as the project engineer and fabricator before the start of steel erection. The purpose of such conference(s) is to develop and review the site-specific erection plan that will meet the requirements of this section. (c) Components of a site-specific erection plan. In developing a sitespecific erection plan, a steel erector considers the following elements: (1) The sequence of erection activity, developed in coordination with the controlling contractor, that includes the following: (i) Material deliveries: (ii) Material staging and storage; and (iii)Coordination with other trades and construction activities.

(2) A description of the crane and derrick selection and placement procedures, including the following: (i) Site preparation; (ii) Path for overhead loads; and (iii) Critical lifts, including rigging supplies and equipment.

(3) A description of steel erection activities and procedures, including the following: (i) Stability considerations requiring temporary bracing and guying; (ii) Erection bridging terminus point; (iii) Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications regarding repair, replacement and modifications; (iv)Columns and beams (including joists and purlins); (v) Connections; (vi)Decking; and (vii)Ornamental and miscellaneous iron.

(4) A description of the fall protection procedures that will be used to comply with §1926.760.

(5) A description of the procedures that will be used to comply with §1926.759.

(6) A description of the special procedures required for hazardous non-routine tasks.

(7) A certification for each employee who has received training for performing steel erection operations as required by §1926.761.

(8) A list of the qualified and competent persons.

(9) A description of the procedures that will be utilized in the event of rescue or emergency response. (d) Other plan information. The plan: (1) Includes the identification of the site and project; and (2) Is signed and dated by the qualified person(s) responsible for its preparation and modification.

1926

Appendix B Subpart R of Part 1926 [Reserved] Appendix C Subpart R of Part 1926 — Illustrations of Bridging Terminus Points: Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With §§1926.757(a)(10) and §1926.757(c)(5)

109

Construction Standards

(ii) The proper procedures and equipment to perform multiple lifts required by §1926.753(e).1926.761(c)(1)(ii) (2) Connector procedures. The employer shall ensure that each connector has been provided training in the following areas:

Appendix C(d)

Appendix C

110

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

Subpart R of Part 1926 — Illustration of the Use of Control Lines To Demarcate

Appendix D(2)

Appendix D Subpart R of Part 1926 — Illustration of the Use of Control Lines To Demarcate Controlled Decking Zones (CDZs): Nonmandatory Guidelines for Complying With §1926.760(c)(3)

111

1926 Construction Standards

(1) When used to control access to areas where leading edge and initial securement of metal deck and other operations connected with leading edge work are taking place, the controlled decking zone (CDZ) is defined by a control line or by any other means that restricts access. (i) A control line for a CDZ is erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 90 feet (27.4 m) from the leading edge. (ii) Control lines extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge and are approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge. (iii) Control lines are connected on each side to a guardrail system, wall, stanchion or other suitable anchorage.

(2) Control lines consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as follows: (i) Each line is rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1.0 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from the walking/working surface. (ii) Each line has a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (90.8 kg).

Appendix E

Selected 1926 Construction Standards

Appendix E Subpart R of Part 1926 — Training: Nonmandatory Guidelines for Complying With §1926.761

The training requirements of §1926.761 will be deemed to have been met if employees have completed a training course on steel erection, including instruction in the provisions of this standard, that has been approved by the U.S. Department of Labor Bureau of Apprenticeship.

Appendix F Subpart R of Part 1926 — Perimeter Columns: Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With §1926.756(e) To Protect the Unprotected Side or Edge of a Walking/Working Surface

In multi-story structures, when holes in the column web are used for perimeter safety cables, the column splice must be placed sufficiently high so as not to interfere with any attachments to the column necessary for the column splice. Column splices are recommended to be placed at every other or fourth levels as design allows. Column splices at third levels are detrimental to the erection process and should be avoided if possible.

Appendix G Subpart R of Part 1926 — §1926.502 (b)-(e) Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices Regulation Stop: Refer to Subpart M .502(b)-(e). (b) "Guardrail systems." Guardrail systems and their use shall comply with the following provisions: (1) Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system members, shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/working level. When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of this paragraph (§1926.502(b)).

Note: When employees are using stilts, the top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to the height of the stilts.

(2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent intermediate structural members shall be installed between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/ working surface when there is no wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches (53 cm) high. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working level. (ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the walking/working level and along the entire opening between top rail supports. (iii) Intermediate members (such as balusters), when used between posts, shall be not more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. (iv) Other structural members (such as additional midrails and architectural panels) shall be installed such that there are no openings in the guardrail system that are more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.

(3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any outward or downward direction, at any point along the top edge.

(4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section (§1926.502) is applied in a downward direction, the top edge of the guardrail shall not deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/working level. Guardrail system components selected and constructed in accordance with the appendix B to subpart M of this part will be deemed to meet this requirement.

(5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and equivalent structural members shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member.

(6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.

(7) The ends of all top rails and midrails shall not overhang the terminal posts, except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.

(8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall not be used as top rails or midrails.

(9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations. If

112

wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be flagged at not more than 6- foot intervals with high-visibility material.

(10) When guardrail systems are used at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable guardrail section shall be placed across the access opening between guardrail sections when hoisting operations are not taking place.

(11) When guardrail systems are used at holes, they shall be erected on all unprotected sides or edges of the hole.

(12) When guardrail systems are used around holes used for the passage of materials, the hole shall have not more than two sides provided with removable guardrail sections to allow the passage of materials. When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed over with a cover, or a guardrail system shall be provided along all unprotected sides or edges.

(13) When guardrail systems are used around holes which are used as points of access (such as ladderways), they shall be provided with a gate, or be so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the hole.

(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and runways shall be erected along each unprotected side or edge.

(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being used for top rails or midrails shall be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure that it continues to meet the strength requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section (§1926.502). (c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems and their use shall comply with the following provisions: (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as practicable under the walking/working surface on which employees are working, but in no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When nets are used on bridges, the potential fall area from the walking/working surface to the net shall be unobstructed.

(2) Safety nets shall extend outward from the outermost projection of the work surface as follows: Minimum required horizontal distance Vertical distance from working of outer edge of net from the edge of the level to horizontal plane of net working surface Up to 5 feet

8 feet

More than 5 feet up to 10 feet

10 feet

More than 10 feet

13 feet

(3) Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient clearance under them to prevent contact with the surface or structures below when subjected to an impact force equal to the drop test specified in paragraph (4) of this section [§1926.502].

(4) Safety nets and their installations shall be capable of absorbing an impact force equal to that produced by the drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section [§1926.502]. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section (§1926.502), safety nets and safety net installations shall be drop-tested at the jobsite after initial installation and before being used as a fall protection system, whenever relocated, after major repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one place.

The drop-test shall consist of a 400 pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ±2 inches (76 ±5 cm) in diameter dropped into the net from the highest walking/working surface at which employees are exposed to fall hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level. (ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is unreasonable to perform the drop-test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section (§1926.502), the employer (or a designated competent person) shall certify that the net and net installation is in compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and (c)(4)(i) of this section (§1926.502) by preparing a certification record prior to the net being used as a fall protection system. The certification record must include an identification of the net and net installation for which the certification record is being prepared; the date that it was determined that the identified net and net installation were in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section (§1926.502) and the signature of the person making the determination and certification. The most recent certification record for each net and net installation shall be available at the jobsite for inspection.

(5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week for wear, damage, and other deterioration.

Defective components shall be removed from service. Safety nets shall also be inspected after any occurrence which could affect the integrity of the safety net system.

(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and tools which have fallen into the safety net shall be removed as soon as possible from the net and at least before the next work shift.

(7) The maximum size of each safety net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, measured center-to-cen-